BOOKS BY 
 
 H. C. TOLMAN, Ph. D., M. R. A. S, 
 
 LATIN. 
 
 CAESAR'S GALLIC WAR. Eight books. By William R.^iney 
 Harper, Ph. D., President of the University of Chicago (late of 
 Yale University), and Herbert Cushing Tolman, Ph. D., of the 
 University of Wisconsin (late of Yale University). i2mo, full cloth, 
 502 pages. Price, $1.20. 
 
 Syracuse University, Syracuse, N. Y. 
 The men from whom this book emanates, are a strong recommendation at 
 the outset. I think any person, whether a preparatory student or a post-grad- 
 uate, could get great benefit from a careful study of .this book I should 
 
 greatly enjoy putting a college. class through the work. I think your book 
 a fine addition to text-books for College Preparatory Schools, and shall not hes- 
 itate to recommend it as occasion may arise. Frank Smalley, A. M., 
 
 Professor of Latin. 
 
 Princeton College, Princeton, N.J. 
 Its peculiar features, ingenious and scholarly, are admirably fitted to thor- 
 oughly interest the young student It is altogether the best book in every 
 
 thing the teacher and pupil can wish for. Wm. A. Packard, Ph. D., 
 
 Professor of Latin. 
 
 Centre High School, Northampton, Mass, 
 A year's course in teaching from Harper and Tolman's Caesar will do as 
 much good to an inexperienced teacher of the classics as it will do to the stu- 
 dent who is taught. Clarence B. Roote, 
 
 Principal and Teacher of Latin. 
 
 "Wir sehen, das Buch ist reichhaltig und planmassig angelegt. Fiir die 
 amerikanischen Studenten ist es gewiss sehr brauchbar, . . . ." — Rud. Menge, 
 in Berliner Philologische IVochenschrifl. 
 
 PERSIAN. 
 
 A GUIDE TO THE OLD PERSIAN INSCRIPTIONS. By 
 Herbert Cushing Tolman, Ph. D., M. R. A. S. i6mo, full cloth, 
 186 pages. Price, $1.50. 
 
 "Professor Tolman gives in forty-two pages the grammatical elements, 
 including a classification of all the best forms which occur in the inscriptions. 
 We gladly welcome this contribution to American scholarship, and we hope 
 that other scholars may follow the example set by Professors Jackson, Lyon, 
 Haupt, Tolman and others." — The Biblia. 
 
 AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY, 
 
 NKW YORK .-. CINCINNATI .'. CHICAGO .-. BOSTON .'. ATLANTA 
 
THE BEHISTAN MOUNTAIN. 
 
A GUIDE 
 
 TO THE 
 
 OLD PERSIAN 
 
 INSCRIPTIONS 
 
 HERBERT GUSHING TOLMAN, Ph. D. (vale) 
 
 FOREIGN MEMBER OF THE ROYAL ASIATIC SOCIETY OF GREAT BRITAIN 
 
 AND IRELAND ; ASSISTANT PROFESSOR OF SANSKRIT IN THE 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF WISCONSIN 
 
 N^W YORK /. CINCINNATI .'. CHICAGO .'. BOSTON .*. ATLANTA 
 A.MERICAN BOOK COMPANY 
 
Copyright, 1803, by H. C. Tolman. 
 
 Typcgraphy by Tracy, Gibbs & Co., Madison, Wi«. 
 

 TO 
 
 MY HONORED TEACHER, 
 
 WILLIAM D WIGHT WHITNEY, Ph. Z>., LL. D, 
 
 under whose instruction and guidance were spent five 
 years of my study in the Sanskrit language^ 
 
 this volume is 
 
 RESPE CTFULL Y DEDICA TED. 
 
 86278 
 
TO THE READER. 
 
 This book does not claim to be a contribution to Iranian subjects. 
 In these recent years there has been such an advancement in this line 
 of scholarship that Sanskrit students have been compelled to surrend- 
 er this field to specialists among whom in America the name of Dr. 
 A. V. Williams Jackson of Columbia College is conspicio is. In 1862 
 Haug published an outline of Avesta grammar in the first edition of 
 his essays. At that time seventy octavo pages were sufficient to con- 
 tain the discovered material. Two years later Justi's grammar of 
 one hundred and fifteen octavo pages was looked upon as practically 
 exhaustive. The grammar of Spiegel appeared in 1867, that of de 
 Harlez in 1878, that of Geiger in 1879. Kavasji Edalji's grammar 
 (1 89 1) and Jackson's grammar (1892) extend four fold the horizon of 
 Avestan scholarship as contrasted with the outline presented by 
 Haug thirty years before, although the same quantity of text of the 
 Avesta is the basis for grammatical work. This statement can enable 
 the reader to realize the great strides this study has made during a 
 few years. My work in the Zend Avesta and in the dialects of Per- 
 sia has been simply an avocation from my chosen field of Sanskrit. 
 
 No book has been published in English containing the grammar, 
 text and vocabulary of all the Old Persian Inscriptions. It was this 
 fact that induced the author in 1891 to issue a little volume entitled 
 "Old Persian Grammar" the copies of which have now been sold. 
 The first fifty pages of the present volume, which contain the gram- 
 matical principles, are based on this work. 
 
 The following features characterize this volume on Old Persian 
 Inscriptions. 
 
 (I.) The grammatical principles arranged as a grammar of the 
 language. 
 
 (2. ) The complete classification of all the verb-forms occurring in 
 the inscriptions. 
 
 (3.) The transliterated text. The portion supplied by conjecture 
 has been inserted without brackets unless the conjectural reading be 
 doubtful. 
 
(4.) The references at the bottom of the page in the text which call 
 ihe attention of the student to the grammar on the first occurrence of 
 a form or principle. 
 
 (5.) The cuneiform text. 
 
 (6.) The translation. 
 
 (7.) The vocabulary giving the related words in Sanskrit, Latin, 
 Gothic, Anglo-Saxon, etc. 
 
 The author recommends to the reader the following books as being 
 of interest in the history of the early decipherment of the inscriptions: 
 
 (I.) Die altpersischen Keilinschriften nach Hrn. Westergaards 
 Mittheilungen. Zeitschrift fiir die Kunde des Morgenlandes heraus- 
 gegeben von Dr. Christian Lassen. Leipzig, 1845. 
 
 (2.) Die persischen Keilinschriften mit Uebersetzung und Glossar 
 von Theodor Benfrey. Leipzig, 1847. 
 
 {3.) The Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and 
 Ireland, Vol. X, by H. C. Rawlinson. London, 1847. ** 
 
 (4.) Memoire sur les inscriptions des Achem^nides, con?ues dans 1' 
 idiome des anciens Persans, par M. Oppert. Journal Asiatique ou 
 recueil de memoires d' extraits et de notices relatifs ei 1' histoire, k 
 la philosophic, aux langues et k la litterature des peuples orientaux. 
 Paris, 1 85 1. 1852. 
 
 (5.) Expedition scientifique en Mesopotamie ex^cut^e par ordre du 
 Gouvernement de 185 1 i 1854 par MM. Fulgence Fresnel, Felix 
 Thomas et Jules Oppert, T. II. pp. 154-256. 
 
 (6.) Memoir on the Scythic Version of the Behistan Inscription by 
 Edwin Norris, M. R. A. S. (Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, Vol. 
 XV, 1855.) 
 
 (7.) Memoire sur les rapports de 1' Egypte et de 1' Assyrie dans V 
 antiquity ^claircis par 1' ^tude des textes cuneiformes, par M. Jules 
 Oppert. Paris, 1869. 
 
 (8.) Die altpersischen Keilinschriften im Grundtexte mit Ueber- 
 setzung. Fr. Spiegel, Leipzig, (two editions). 
 
 (9.) Zur Erklarung der altpersischen Keilinschriften von Dr. H. 
 Kern. Zeitschrift der Deutschen morgenlandischen Gesellschaft, 
 Band XXIII, 1869. 
 
 (10.) Inscriptiones Palaeo-Persicae. Cajetan Kossowicz, St. Peters- 
 burg, 1872. 
 
In my references to foreign journals, I have used abbreviations as 
 little as possible. They are mostly of the nature of the following and 
 need not be explained. 
 
 ZDMG. =Zeitschrift der Deutschen morgenVdndischen Gesellshaft\ f. 
 vergl. Sprachforsch.=:fur vergleichende Sprachforsckung; idg.-=:indo- 
 germanische; ai.^:^altindische; Wb.^Worterbuch, etc., etc. 
 
 The author is aware of the many faults this book contains as fully 
 as the severest critic can be, and he shall be glad to receive all sug- 
 gestions which may make it more useful to the reader, 
 
 Herbert Gushing Tolman. 
 
 Madison, Wisconsin, November 4th, 1892. 
 
TABIvK OK CONTENTS. 
 
 Grammar, _..--_. 5 
 
 Verb-Forms, ._--.. 48 
 
 Inscriptions, ------- 53 
 
 Cuneiform Text, - - - - - * - 93 
 
 Translation, - - - - - - 115 
 
 Vocabulary, ------- 161 
 
ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 AOR., 
 
 A. S.. 
 
 AVEST 
 
 CF., 
 
 ENG., 
 
 GERM., 
 
 GOTH., 
 
 IMPF., 
 
 IMPV.. 
 
 - Aorist INF., 
 
 Anglo Saxon LAT., 
 
 Avestan PART. 
 
 Compare PERF. 
 
 English PRES.. 
 
 - German SKT., 
 
 Gothic SLAV., 
 
 ■ Infinitive 
 
 - Latin 
 
 Participle 
 
 Perfect 
 
 Present 
 
 Sanskrit 
 
 Slavonic 
 
 Imperfect I.S., etc., 1st person singular, etc. 
 Imperative 1. P., etc., 1st person plural, etc. 
 
GRAMMAR. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 The Old Persian language deserves a larger place in 
 American scholarship than it has yet received. Here- 
 tofore the work has been left entirely to European 
 scholars, and it is due to a desire to awaken an inter- 
 est in this old tongue among scholars of our own 
 country that this little book has come into existence. 
 I take the opportunity of expressing my gratitude to 
 my pupil, WoLCOTT Webster Ellsworth, a gradu- 
 ate of Yale and a member of the American Oriental 
 Society, for help furnished me. He has taken my 
 manuscript, which was in most part in the form of lec- 
 tures, and arranged the whole work for the press. He 
 also rendered much service in the transliteration of the 
 cuneiform text. 
 
 I shall gladly receive all suggestions or corrections 
 which may make this volume more helpful in impart- 
 ing enthusiasm in the study of this our sister tongue. 
 
 H. C. T. 
 
 New HaveUj Conn.y June^ i8gi. 
 
 PREFACE TO SECOND EDITION. 
 
 The copies of the first edition are exhausted. The 
 author has taken this opportunity to revise and am- 
 plify the whole work. He wishes to express his grati- 
 fication for the kind reception the previous edition has 
 received and also to make acknowledgment of many 
 valuable suggestions. H. C. T. 
 
 Madison, Wis.y Aug., i8p2. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 Professor Grotefend was the pioneer in the decipher- 
 ment of the cuneiform text. His first discovery was 
 announced in the Literary Gazette of Gottingen, in the 
 year 1802. About one-third of the Old Persian 
 alphabet was determined by his transliteration of 
 the names of Cyrus, Darius, Xerxes and Hystas- 
 pes. Professor Rask added to this number the 
 two characters representing M and N. A memoir 
 of M. Burnouf published in June, 1836, and a work 
 Ox Professor Lassen published at Bonn in May, 1836, 
 entitled Die Alt-Persischen Keil-Inschriften von Per- 
 sepolis, furnished a true determination of twelve addi- 
 tional characters. Dr. Beer, of Leipzig, in a review 
 published in Allgemein. Hall. Literat. Zeitung in the 
 year 1838, announced the discovery of the two char- 
 acters for H and Y. M. Jacquet is said to have made 
 the same discoveries independently at Paris, and also 
 identified the equivalents for C and JH. 
 
 It is evident that a cursive style of writing was em- 
 ployed for epistolary purposes and had an existence 
 contemporaneous with the cuneiform, since the char- 
 acter of the latter rendered it fit only for lapidary uses, 
 [Cf. Daniel VI, 9; Nehemiah II, 9; Herodotus VII, 
 100.]. No Persian cuneiform writing appears after the 
 time of Artaxerxes Ochus, and we are safe in say- 
 ing that it died out at the end of the rule of the 
 Achsemenian kings. 
 
 The oldest inscription is that of Cyrus the Great, 
 which perhaps may be his sepulchral inscription although 
 the epitaph quoted by Strabo and Ctesias differs from 
 the one on this Old Persian monument. The latest is 
 
the inscription of Artaxerxes Ochus which exhibits 
 many peculiarities of grammatical structure indicating 
 the decay of the language. In this inscription two 
 compound characters for BUM and DAH are intro- 
 duced (cf. Cuneiform alphabet); also before this time 
 in the tablets of Xerxes appears an ideogram for 
 KHSHAY^THIY^, due undoubtedly to Semitic in- 
 fluences. 
 
 The most important of the inscriptions is the great 
 inscription of Darius carved upon the sacred mountain 
 Behistan [BAGA and ST^N^ />lace of God]. This 
 immense rock rose to a perpendicular height of 1700 
 feet from the plain below. On this conspicuous place 
 Darius Hystaspes caused to be inscribed the history 
 of his reign to be a legacy to succeeding generations. 
 The figures of Darius and his attendants are executed 
 with considerable skill, yet inferior to that shown in 
 the bas-reliefs of Persepolis. Before Darius stand 
 nine usurpers to the throne bound with a cord about 
 their necks, while under the foot of the king lies the 
 prostrate form of another. These are intentionally of 
 rude design and small stature. Above the picture is 
 the efifigy of the Persian god Auramazda. 
 
 The Old Persian language is most closely related to 
 the Vedic dialect of the Sanskrit, yet the interpretation 
 of the inscriptions depends upon the combined aid of the 
 Sanskrit and Avestan together with the surviving dia- 
 lects of Persia which have been in any degree faithful 
 to their mother tongue. Where the cognate or deriva- 
 tive word fails to appear in them, an arbitrary mean- 
 ing must be assigned to the Old Persian to suit the con- 
 text; hence I have given in the vocabulary the authority 
 of the related languages for the signification of each 
 word, wherever such authority can be obtained. 
 
TJNIVERSITT 
 
 GRAMIVEAR. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 EUPHONY. 
 
 I. A conventional arrangement of the European 
 letters, transliterating the Old Persian cuneiform char- 
 acters, is as follows: 
 
 I guttural, a, a. 
 Vowels, simple •< palatal, i. 
 ( labial, u. 
 
 Diphthongs \ P^'!^'f '- ^'' ^'- 
 ^ ^ ( labial, auy au. 
 
 SURD. SURD ASP. SONANT. NASAL. 
 
 ^ guttural, k kh g — 
 
 palatal, c — j — 
 
 dental, t th d n 
 
 labial, p f b m 
 
 ( palatal, y. 
 Semivowels •< lingual, r. 
 ( labial, v. 
 j lingual, sh. 
 I dental, s. 
 Aspiration, h. 
 Note i. The short a has no written sign (in the 
 cuneiform text) unless it be initial. Therefore a (italic) 
 has been used for this vowel in the transliteration. But 
 when it is initial the same sign is employed for short 
 a as for long a (vide infra), since the native characters 
 make no distinction; e. g., ad<3;m 
 
 Note 2. The long a is transliterated in all cases by 
 a simple a (in Roman type), e. g., Pars^. 
 
 
 Sibilants 
 
12 
 
 EUPHONIC COMBINATION. 
 
 2. Two similar vowels coalesce, forming the cor- 
 responding long vowel; thus, p^sav^ for pasa, and 
 av^. 
 
 Actual examples can be cited of no vowels coalescing except a-vow- 
 els, yet undoubtedly should other successive vowels occur, they would 
 suffer the above treatment. 
 
 3. The short a combines with a following i-vowel and 
 
 u-vowel to ai and au respectively; thus, Pars^iy for 
 
 Pars<^ 4- iy; the long a to ai and au; thus, aniyauva 
 
 for aniya -f- uva. 
 
 Note. An example of a and i forming ai (as in the Sanskrit the 
 long a and i combine into e [ai] ) instead of ai, is found in the com- 
 pound partita for p«ra and ita. 
 
 4. An i-vowel and u-vowel interpose their cor- 
 responding semivowel before a dissimilar vowel; thus, 
 bumiya, bumi -f a; isuvam, isu -|- am. Sometimes, 
 however, the vowel is converted into its semivowel 
 (especially if it be the final vowel of a diphthong); thus, 
 ab^v^, for ab^u + a. 
 
 For exception, cf. dnraiapiy. 
 
 5. No vowel (except a and a) nor diphthong can 
 end a word. There is inserted as a protection the 
 corresponding semivowel; thus, up^riy, for up<3:n; 
 patuv, for patu; Pars^iy, for Pars^i. 
 
 Note i. An exception seems to be adari (NRa). 
 Note 2. Hau retains the v even before ci, mai, and tai; e. g. 
 hrtuvci (I). Also occur p«ruvnam, p«ruvz«nanam. 
 
 6. Final a is sometimes made short before an en- 
 clitic; thus, av<2d^shim, for av^dashim; m^n^ca, for 
 m<3:naca. Many examples remain, however, of the 
 long a preserved; thus, utam<3;iy, y^thasham, etc. 
 
 7. The semivowel is often connected with a pre- 
 ceding consonant by its corresponding vowel; thus, 
 adurujiy^, for adurujy^. 
 
13 
 
 8. A root is often expanded by vowel-insertion; 
 thus, duruj, for druj (Skt. druh). 
 
 9. Every Old Persian word must end in sh, m, an 
 
 a-vowel, or a semivowel. Should any other letters 
 stand as finals etymologically, they are dropped; thus 
 3.]a, for aj^nt. 
 
 10. The dental S, when preceded by any vowel 
 except a and a, is changed into the lingual sh; thus, 
 Dar<3;y<3:vush, aish<a;, (for exceptions cf. isu, usrtt^sh<^n^, 
 V^umisa, Nisay^): also after kh, and sometimes after 
 r; thus, khshapa, ad^rshn^ush, (^but tarsatiy, Pars^, 
 etc.). 
 
 Note. In the root had (originally sad) the influence of a-preceding 
 i is felt, even with the augment; thus, niyashadayam. 
 
 11. The final S, after being changed into h, is lost; 
 thus, Pars<2(h) m«rtiya(h). 
 
 12. The dental before t is changed into S (as in 
 Avestan); thus, hasta, bound, for b^dt^. 
 
 The semivowel r sometimes causes a preceding con- 
 sonant to become aspirated; thus, c<3:khriya (from k^r), 
 Mithr^, ufr^^st^m. 
 
 14. Final h has gone over into the palatal j in the 
 root duruj (Skt. druh), the influence of the aspiration 
 being felt only in the form durukht^m. This exhibits 
 the treatment of the palatal, namely, that it reverts 
 to its original guttural if followed by any other sound 
 than a vowel. 
 
 Note. Final h of ihah becomes s befcre t; thus, thastanaiy. 
 
 15. Medial h has a tendency to fall away; thus, 
 thatiy, for th^h^tiy; mahya for mahahya, (but Aur^- 
 m^zdah^). 
 
PART II. 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 
 
 CASE ENDINGS. 
 
 i6. Endings: Singular, a. The usual masculine 
 and feminine ending in the nominative is S. Stems in 
 a and a have allowed the S to pass over into h (cf. 
 II ) which has dropped away, thus leaving the bare 
 stem. Stems in i and U retain the S in the form sh 
 (cf. lo). By consonant forms it is euphonically lost. 
 Neuters(except ^-stems, which add m) show the sim- 
 ple stem in this case. The pronominal ending for 
 this gender is historically t, which is dropped at the 
 end of a word, but changed to sh before the enclitic 
 ciy. The common ending of the personal pronouns 
 is ^m (which is found also in the plural). 
 
 B. The accusative ends in m or am. in masculine 
 and feminine nouns. The neuter has the same end- 
 ing as the nominative. 
 
 C. The instrumental ending is a. In the pronom- 
 inal declensions the nasal (n) is inserted between the 
 stem and ending. 
 
 D. The ablative of ^-stems doubtless ended in the 
 historical t or d, which being final has been dropped 
 euphonically (cf. 9). Elsewhere the ablative has the 
 same ending as the genitive. 
 
 E. The genitive of ^-stems adds hya (for original 
 •sy^). The ending of consonant stems is a for ^h 
 (original ^s). Masculine stems in i and u have regu- 
 larly the historic ending ^s, the a of which combines 
 
15 
 
 with the vowel of the stem into al (ai) and au, the S 
 being preserved in the form sh (cf. lo). Feminine 
 stems take the fuller ending, a for ah (original as) sep- 
 arated by an interspersed y. 
 
 F. The locative ending is i in consonant and a- 
 stems, Avhich appear euphonically in the form iy, aiy 
 (cf. 5). In masculine u-stems this case ends in au 
 (euphonically ^uv for an original avi). If this case oc- 
 curred in a masculine i-stem, the form would be anal- 
 ogous, i. e., <3:in(euphonically <3:iy for an original ^yi). 
 An artificial ending of feminine stems is the addition 
 of a to the masculine ending; thus, ^uva, a'lya. The 
 true locative ending of this gender appears probably 
 in one or two words in the form a, (duvaraya,, d^st<2:ya? 
 perhaps loc. dual, Arbiraya). 
 
 G. The vocative ends in the simple stem. 
 
 Dual: a. The ending of the nominative, accus- 
 ative, and vocative is a as in the Veda. 
 
 B. A doubtful form of the locative occurs as a, 
 (dastaya.. ) 
 
 Plural: a. In the nominative the masculine and 
 feminine ending aha appears, (corresponding to the 
 Vedic asas). The shorter ending a, ah. (original as) 
 is also in use. Pronominal ^-stems have the mascu- 
 line nominative in ai. The neuter stems in a end 
 in a. 
 
 B. The accusative ending is a for ah (original 
 [^]ns) in consonant-stems. In ^-stems the case appears 
 in the form a. Neuter stems have this case like the 
 nominative. 
 
i6 
 
 C. The instrumental has everywhere the form bish, 
 uniting with ^-sterns into <3:ibish. 
 
 D. In the genitive the ending is am. In stems 
 ending in a vowel, the nasal n is inserted, before which 
 a short vowel is lengthened. In pronominal declen- 
 sions s is the inserted consonant, before which a be- 
 comes di. 
 
 E. The locative ending is suva. When preceded 
 by a or a, the S passes over into h and is dropped, the 
 form becoming uva. When preceded by other vowels 
 the S is preserved, and the ending appears as shuva 
 (cf. lo). 
 
 17. 
 
 The normal 
 
 scheme 
 
 of endi 
 
 ings 
 
 is as follows: 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 DUAL. 
 
 
 PLURAL, 
 
 N. 
 
 s(m) 
 
 
 a.? 
 
 
 a\ia, a (a) 
 
 A. 
 
 avi\. m 
 
 
 a.? 
 
 
 ^(a) 
 
 I. 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 bish 
 
 Ab. 
 
 a 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 — 
 
 G. 
 
 a, (a)s, 
 
 hya 
 
 a.? 
 
 
 am 
 
 L. 
 
 i(a) 
 
 
 a? 
 
 
 Suva, uva 
 
 For convenience in comparison the case endings in 
 Sanskrit are added. 
 
 (a) 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 DUAL. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 N. 
 
 s(m) 
 
 
 a(au) 
 
 ^S^S, «S, 
 
 A. 
 
 ^m, m. 
 
 
 a(au) 
 
 ^s, n, (a) 
 
 I. 
 
 a 
 
 
 bhyam 
 
 bhis, ais 
 
 D. 
 
 e 
 
 
 bhyam 
 
 bhy^s 
 
 Ab. 
 
 as, (^d) 
 
 
 bhyam 
 
 bhy^s 
 
 G. 
 
 ^s (as) s, 
 
 sy^. 
 
 OS 
 
 am 
 
 L. 
 
 i (am)au 
 
 
 OS 
 
 su 
 
17 
 
 DECLENSION I. 
 
 1 8. Stems (masculine and neuter) in a. 
 pies : haga, m. , god ; \\amaxana, n. , battle. 
 
 Exam- 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 N. haga 
 
 A. hagam 
 
 I. b^^ga 
 
 Ab. hagsi 
 
 G. b^g^hya 
 
 L. b^grtiy 
 
 V. hags. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 N. hamaranam 
 A. hamaranam 
 
 N.A. b^ga? (g^usha) 
 L. b«g<^ya? (d<3:st^ya) 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 N. 
 
 b<?:gah^, b^ga 
 
 N. 
 
 hamaran3. 
 
 A. 
 
 b^ga 
 
 A. 
 
 hamarana, 
 
 I. 
 
 b^g^ibish 
 
 
 
 G. 
 
 b^ganam 
 
 
 
 L. 
 
 b<2:g^ishuva 
 
 
 
 Examples of peculiar forms are : 
 
 A. The gen. sing, in hy^ for hya (G^rm^p^d^hy^). 
 
 B. The abl. sing, in a for a (darshama). 
 
 C. The loc. sing, in y for iy (dur^y). 
 
 D. The accusative of d^r^y^ is identical with the 
 
 stem in SZb. 
 
 DECLENSION II. 
 
 19. Stems (masculine) in a. 
 m<2zda m., Auramazda. 
 
 Example : Aur*^- 
 
 N. Aur^m<2:zda 
 
 A. Aur^zm^zdam 
 
 G. Aur^ih<2zdaha, or Aur<3:m^zdah^ 
 
i8 
 
 DECLENSION III. 
 
 20. Stems (masculine) in i and u. Example of 
 i-stem : C^zishpi, m., Caishpis. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 N. C<^ishpish 
 
 A. Crtishpim 
 Ab.G. C^ishp^^ish, or C^ishpaish 
 
 Example of u-stem : gathu, m., place. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 N. gathush G. gathunam 
 
 A. gathum 
 1. gathva 
 
 Ab.G. gath^ush 
 L. gath^uv 
 
 Note : The genitive singular of Darayavan is Darayavahaush. 
 
 DECLENSION IV. 
 
 21. Stems (feminine) in a, i, and u. Example of 
 a-stem: t<^uma, f. , family. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 N. tauma, G. t^umanam 
 
 A. taumam L. t^umaiiva 
 
 Ab. G. t^umaya 
 L. t<3:umaya or t^um<3;ya 
 
 Example of i-stem: Bumi, f., earth. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 N. bumish 
 
 A. bumim 
 
 Ab. G. bumiya 
 
 Note : The ending sh of the nominative singular is dropped 
 before the enclitic shim in hiapism (Bh. I, 19). 
 
19 
 
 Example of u-stem: d^hyu, f. , country (perhaps 
 irregular). 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 N. d^hyaush N. dahyava 
 
 A. d<7hyaum or d^hyum A. d^hyav^ 
 
 G. d^hyunam 
 
 L. d^hy^^uva L. d^hyushuva 
 
 DECLENSION V. 
 22. Stems in ar. Example: fr^^mat^^r m., leader. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 N. fr<?mata 
 
 A. fr<^matarrt:m or fr<i;mat<7r^m 
 
 G. fr<^matr<rz (pitr^?) 
 
 DECLENSION VI. 
 23. Stems ending in a consonant. 
 
 A. Examples: n^z-patjm., grandson; vith,m., clan. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 N. n^7pa 
 
 A. nrtpat^zm(?) 
 
 I. n^7pata(.?) 
 
 L. n<^pati(.?) 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 A. vith<^m 
 
 I. vitha I. vithibish or vith^bish 
 
 L. vithi 
 
 B. Stems in an (m^n, van). Examples: Vi(n)- 
 dairan, m., Vindafra ; nam<3:n, n., name; asman, m., 
 heaven; khsh<2tr^pav^n, m., satrap. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 N. Vi(n)d«fra 
 
 A. Vi(n)d«fran^m 
 
20 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 nsLvna 
 
 
 
 A. 
 
 nam^ 
 
 
 
 A. 
 
 asman^m 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 khsh^tmpava 
 
 
 
 c. 
 
 Stems in ^s, ish. 
 
 Examples: raucas, 
 
 n., day; 
 
 h^dish, 
 
 n., site. 
 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 rauca 
 
 I. r^uc^bish 
 
 
 A. 
 
 rauca 
 
 
 
 N. h^dish 
 
 A. h^dish 
 
 HETEROCLITES. 
 24. Nouns of other declensions have a tendency 
 to assume forms of declension I. Thus, Khsh^yar- 
 sh^hyafor Khsh^yarshaha ; Dar<3:y^v^(h)ush^hya for 
 Dar<2:y«v^h^ush ; bum<2m for bumim ; also n^m^: some- 
 times takes the form of a feminine noun in a ; thus, 
 n^ma for nama. 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 25. The comparative and superlative endings are 
 t^r^ and tama ; also iy^s and isht^ make correspond- 
 ing forms of comparison. 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 26. The pronouns of the first and second persons 
 are thus declined : ad^m, I ; tuv^m, thou. 
 N. adam N. v<3;y^m 
 
 A. mam (enc. mam) G. amakh^m 
 
 Ab. (enc. m^) 
 G. mflina (enc. m^iy) 
 
21 
 
 N. tuv^m 
 
 A. thuvam 
 
 G. (enc. taiy, tay, Bh. IV, II.) 
 
 27. The demonstrative pronoun 3.va is declined as 
 follows : 
 
 SING. 
 
 A 
 G 
 
 a.va (with enc. ciy, av^shciy) 
 av^hya 
 
 avrtm — 
 avahya. — 
 
 PLUR. M. F. N. 
 
 N. avaiy ava — 
 
 A. av<^iy 
 
 G. av<3:isham — — 
 
 28. The declension of the other demonstrative 
 hauv (Skt. asau), that, he ; ait^ (Skt. etat), this ; and 
 [yarn (Skt., ay^m), this, is as follows: 
 
 SING. M. 
 
 N. hauv 
 
 N. im^iy ima ima 
 A. imaiy ima ima 
 
 N. iy^m iy^m im<2: 
 
 A. im^m imam 
 
 I. ana 
 
 G. — ahyaya, or ahiyaya 
 
 SING. M. 
 
 N. ait^ 
 A. ait^ 
 
 29. Enclitic forms of the pronoun of the third 
 person are : 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 A. shim 
 G. sh^iy 
 
 A. shish 
 G. sham 
 
 A. dim A. dish 
 
 30. The declension of the relative (hy^ [Skt. sy^] 
 ty^m, etc.) is as follows: ■ 
 
22 
 
 N. hya hya tya N. ty^-iy — tya 
 
 A. tyam — A. ty^-iy — — 
 
 I. ty^na — — G. ty^iisham tyrt:isham — 
 
 31. The interrogative pronoun occurs only in the 
 vocative (masculine singular) ka. 
 
 The indefinite pronoun is formed by adding the 
 neuter of the pronominal stem ci ; thus, k^sciy, cishciy. 
 
 32. The adjective aniy^, other, forms its neuter 
 according to the pronominal declension ; thus, ani- 
 y<2shciy ; its ablative is aniy^xna, after the analogy of 
 the instrumental. Hama, all, has the genitive fem- 
 inine singular h^m^hyaya. 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 33. The scheme of the normal endings of the verb 
 is as follows : 
 
 PRIMA R Y ENDINGS. 
 
 I. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 SING. PLUR. SING. 
 
 mi m^hy a\ 
 hy - - 
 ti ^(n)ti t^i 
 
 
 
 SECONDARY ENDINGS. 
 
 I. 
 2. 
 3- 
 
 am 
 
 (h) 
 (t),s 
 
 ma i 
 a(v\), sh^(n) ta 
 
 I. 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 
 I M PER A T, VE ENDINGS. 
 
 (^)di 
 tu 
 
 ta uva 
 — tarn 
 
 <2:(n)ta 
 
 Note. The ending of the second person hy appears in the form 
 h<^/ before the enclitic dish. 
 
23 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 34. The mood-sign of the subjunctive is a, which 
 is added to the tense-stem. If the tense-stem end in 
 a, the combination results in a. The inscriptions 
 show the primary ending's ; thus, ah<3:tity f rom ah, \>a- 
 vatiy from bu (tense-stem havd). 
 
 OPTATIVE MOOD. 
 35. The inscriptions show ya as the mood-sign of 
 the optative, which takes the regular series of sec- 
 ondary endings. Doubtless the simple i was taken by 
 the tense-stems in a and by the middle voice. The 
 ya is connected with the stem by the union-vowel i. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 36. The imperative has no mood-sign ; it adds its 
 endings directly to the tense-stem. 
 
 AUGMENT. 
 
 37. The augment is a prefixed a. If the tense- 
 stem begin with the vowel i (or u) the augment com- 
 bines with it into the strengthened diphthong ai (or 
 au) instead of the regular a\, aw. 
 
 A. In a few cases the augment appears as a ; thus, 
 patiyaharam. It is possible, however, to regard this 
 a as the combination of the augment and the prefix a. 
 
 REDUPLICATION. 
 38. Old Persian reduplication shows the prefix- 
 ion to a verb-root of its initial consonant and vowel. 
 
 A. A long vowel is made short in the reduplica- 
 ting syllable ; thus, ad<^da from da. 
 
 B. A palatal is substituted for a guttural as the 
 consonant of the reduplicating syllable ; thus, c^khriya 
 from kar. 
 
24 
 
 THE CONJUGATION-CLASSES. 
 
 39. The present system (composed of the indic- 
 ative, subjunctive, optative and imperative) is divided 
 into the following classes : 
 
 I. ROOT-CLASS. 
 
 In this class there is no class-sign ; the personal 
 endings are added directly to the root, unless there 
 be a mood-sign, as in the subjunctive and optative. 
 
 II. REDUPLICATING-CLASS. 
 
 In this class the present-stem is formed by prefix- 
 ing a reduplication to the root. 
 
 III. THE NU-CLASS. 
 
 This class forms' its present-stem by adding the 
 syllable nu, which is strengthened to nau in the sing- 
 ular. 
 
 IV. THE NA-CLASS. 
 
 The syllable na (in the plural ni) is added to the 
 root to form the present-stem. 
 
 V. THE ^-CLASS. 
 
 The present-stem is formed by adding a to the 
 root, which (i) is strengthened or (2) remains un- 
 changed. 
 
 VI. THE Y^- CLASS. 
 
 The class-sign is ya, which is added to the simple 
 root. 
 
 VII. THE ^Y^- CLASS. 
 
 This class adds aya to the strengthened root. 
 
25 
 
 I. ROOT-CLASS. 
 40. Example : jan, smite. 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 1. ]a(n)miy 
 
 2. j<a:(n)hy 
 
 3. j^(n)tiy 
 
 1. — 
 
 2. ]anahy 
 
 3. ]anatiy 
 
 1. j^niyam 
 
 2. j^niya 
 
 3. j^niya 
 
 2. ]a(n)diy 
 
 3. j«(n)tuv 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 PLUR. SING. PLUR. 
 
 ]a(n)mahy janaiy — 
 
 j^n^(n)tiy ]a{n)ta[y — 
 
 PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 ? ]anataiy — 
 
 PRESENT OPTATIVE. 
 
 j^niyama .? — 
 
 ? j^niyata ? 
 
 PRESENT IMPERATIVE. 
 
 j^(n)ta 
 
 ]<7nuva — 
 j^(n)tam — 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 aj^(n)ma 2i]aniy 
 
 1. aj^n^m 
 
 2. aj^ — — — 
 
 3. Si]a 3.]ana(n) aj^(n)ta aj^n^(n)ta 
 
 The form aitiy, (SZb) from root I shows that the 
 root is strengthened, if it is able, in the three persons 
 of the singular active. 
 
 As an example of a root beginning with I, illustra- 
 ting the heavy augment, the form nijay^im (for nijai^m) 
 from root I, *go,' can be quoted. 
 
 The verb ah, be, preserves the original s before t. 
 Its forms are as follows : 
 
26 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 1. amiy amahy 
 
 2. ahy — 
 
 3- astiy h^(n)tiy 
 
 PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 3. ahatiy 
 
 IMPERFECT ACTIVE. 
 
 1. aham — 
 
 2. — — 
 
 3- 3ha ah^(n) 
 
 IMPERFECT MIDDLE. 
 
 3. ah<a;(n)ta and aha(n)ta 
 
 II. REDUPLICATING-CLASS. 
 41. Example : da, put. 
 
 Present Imperative, 3. s., d^datuv. 
 Imperfect, 3. s., ad^da. 
 
 Note. The root sta, stand, takes the vowel I as reduplication, and 
 shortens the stem-vowel : aisht^ta. 
 
 III. NU-CLASS. 
 
 42. Examples: j^d, ask; d^rsh, dare, 
 Present Imperative, 2. s., j^dn^utuv. 
 Imperfect, 3. s., ad^rshn^ush. 
 
 The verb k^r, do, shortens the root to ku in the 
 present and imperfect. Its forms are as follows : 
 
27 
 
 PRESENT subjunctive: SING. PLUR. 
 
 2. kun^vahy 
 imperfect: 
 
 I. akun^v^m akuma (for akunuma) 
 
 3. akun^ush (in [S],akun<^sh) akun^v^(n) 
 
 MIDDLE imperfect: 
 
 3. skunavata. (in Bh. I, 12, akuta). 
 
 Note. The union-vowel a sometimes follows nu, which is strength- 
 ened to nav; thus, vainavatiy, kunavahy, for varnava-a-ti, etc. 
 
 IV. NA-CLASS. 
 
 43. All forms of this class are regular (except 
 Imperf. I. s., adin^m, from di, for adinam) ; thus, 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1. adinam 
 
 2. adina, etc. 
 
 V. ^-CLASS. 
 
 44. Examples : gub, call ; bu, be ; b^r, bear ; 
 jiv, live. 
 
 Note. In the following classes, the stem-final a is lengthened to 
 a before m of the 1st personal endings, but is lost before ^m of the 
 1st sing, imperf. and the 3d pi. endings, and the short a of the ending 
 remains (or vice versa). The imperative takes no ending (unless it 
 be a, which unites with the class-sign into a). 
 
 (I.) Examples of the strengthened root (cor- 
 responding to the unaccented <a;-class of the Sanskrit) 
 are gub and bu. Roots in u (and i) strengthen their 
 vowel to au (and ai) which before the case-sign ap- 
 pears as av (and ay). 
 
 PRESENT MIDDLE : SING. PLURAL. 
 
 3, gauhataiy 
 
 PRESENT ACT. SUBJ. 
 
 2. b<3:vahy 
 
 3. b^vatiy 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 1 . 3.hayam 
 
 2. ahava 
 
 3. ahava ab^v^z(n). 
 
28 
 
 (2.) Examples of the unchanged root (correspond- 
 ing to the accented ^-class of the Sanskrit) are bar 
 and jiv. 
 
 PRESENT ACTIVE. SING. PLURAL. 
 
 2. harahy 
 
 3. haratiy hara(n)tiy 
 
 PRESENT ACT. SUBJ. 
 
 2. b^rahy 
 
 3. harsLtiy 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 2. jiva 
 
 3. jiv^tuv 
 
 IMPERFECT ACTIVE. 
 
 3. 3.hara ab<3;r^(n) 
 
 IMPERFECT MIDDLE. 
 
 3. aharata. ab^r^(n)ta 
 
 VI. Y^-CLASS. 
 
 Note i. The passive formation is the middle-endings added to 
 the class-sign. 
 
 Note 2. The class sign is often connected with the root by an 
 interposed i. 
 
 Examples : duruj, deceive ; m^r, die ; th^h, say. 
 
 A. Examples of the simple class in active are 
 duruj, mar. 
 present active, sing. 
 
 1. durujiyamiy 
 
 pres. act. subj., 
 
 2. durujiyahy 
 
 imperfect active, 
 
 3. adurujiya 
 
 imperfect middle, 
 
 3. amariy^ta 
 
29 
 
 B. Example of the passive formation is th^h, which 
 verb adds the active ending in the first person plural. 
 
 PRESENT, PLURAL. 
 
 I. th^hyam^^hy 
 
 Note 3. The passive formation of k^r, do, is upon the strength- 
 ened stem; e. g., Imperf. 3. s., akun^vyata. 
 
 Note 4. It is possible to regard the form ath^hy^? as the imper- 
 fect 3d sing., with the active ending, instead of the middle, yet pos- 
 sessed of a passive sense. I prefer to read, however, athahy, 
 believing it to be the passive aorist with short vowel in the stem. 
 (Cf. 50 N.) 
 
 VII. A FA-CLASS. 
 46. 
 
 Note i. A causative conjugation is made from this class, but all 
 verbs belonging to this class have not a causative value. 
 Note 2. The class-sign is added to the strengthened root. 
 
 Examples : d^r, hold ; ish, send ; sta, stand. 
 
 A. Examples of the simple class are d^r, and ish. 
 
 Present, i. s. , dar<3:yamiy 
 Imperfect, 3. s., adsLvaya 
 
 IMPERFECT, SING. 
 
 1. aish^y^m 
 
 2. a.ishaya 
 
 B. Example of the causative conjugation is sta. 
 
 IMPERFECT, SING. 
 
 I. astay^m 
 
 3. astay<^ 
 
 Note 3. Sometimes the class-sign appears as aya; thus, agarbay- 
 am, ag^rbaya, etc. 
 
 Verbs sometimes make their formation in more 
 than one class; thus, j^diyamiy and ]adna\ituv. 
 
 THE PERFECT. 
 47. The Old Persian has left us only one exam- 
 ple of the perfect; i. e., Optative, 3 s., c^khriya from 
 kar. 
 
30 
 
 THE AORIST. 
 
 48. There have been preserved two aorists; (i) 
 the root aorist, which adds the personal endings di- 
 rectly to the root, and (2) the sibilant aorist, which 
 takes sa as a tense-sign. An example of the root 
 aorist is the form ada, 3d person singular of da. Ex- 
 amples of the sibilant aorist are aish^a;, 3d person 
 sing., and aish^(n), 3d person plur. of root I. 
 
 49. The aorist adds the secondary endings to the 
 tense-stem, to which the augment has been prefixed. 
 
 50. The root-aorist has a peculiar formation, 
 
 which is passive in meaning, corresponding to what 
 
 the Hindu grammarians call the "passive aorist" of 
 
 the Sanskrit. The third person singular of the middle 
 
 is the only form in use. This person is made by 
 
 adding i (which it has borrowed from the first person) 
 
 to the root. Euphonically, the form appears as iy or 
 
 y. The root is usually strengthened; thus, adariy 
 
 or adary from dar. 
 
 Note. In the root thah, the stem-vowel remains short; thus, 
 ath^hy (for athahy). The Hindu grammarians mention certain roots 
 of the Sanskrit in avs\, which preserve the short a ; thus, agami, 
 avnrdhi, etc. 
 
 51. The optative of the root-aorist doubtless ap- 
 pears in ag^miya from g^m. 
 
 Note. The root bu loses its stem-vowel in this mode; e. g., biya. 
 
 FUTURE. 
 52. The Old Persian has left no future-system. 
 A periphrastic future is built out of a nomen agentis 
 and the auxiliary bu; thus, j^ta biya (Bh. IV, 17), 
 let him be a killer; i. e., let him kill (he shall kill). 
 
 PASSIVE PARTICIPLE. 
 53. The passive participle is formed by adding ta 
 to the simple root; thus, k^rt^ from k^r. 
 
31 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 54. The Old Persian infinitive is formed by the 
 suffix tana (Lat. tinus in crastinus, diutinus) which 
 appears always in the locative case; thus, ka(n)ta- 
 naiy from kan. 
 
 Note. The infinitive of k^r change the initial guttural of the 
 root to a palatal: e. g., cortanaiy. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 55. With accusative: abiy, ant^r, athiy, up^riy, 
 upa, prttiy, p^tish, prt:riy. 
 
 With instrumental: p^tiy, h^da. 
 With genitive: abish, p^tiy, p^sa. 
 With ablative: haca.. 
 With locative; anuv, p^tiy. 
 
 VERBAL PREFIXES. 
 56. atiy — across, beyond ud, us — up, out. 
 ap^ — away, forth. upa — to, towards. 
 
 a.va — down, off. ni — down, into. 
 
 a — to, unto. nij — out, forth. 
 
 p^ra — away, forth. 
 
 fr<3: — forward, forth. 
 
 h^m — together. 
 
 PRIMARY SUFFIXES. 
 
 57. a, 2Lj ah, i, ish, u, t<3;r (forming nouns of agency 
 and relationship), ti, tu, tha, thi, thu, tr^, da, na, 
 m^n, ma, ya, yu, ra. 
 
32 
 
 SECONDARY SUFFIXES. 
 
 58. iya, pertaining to (used also to form the pa- 
 tronymic). 
 
 a.ina, consisting of. 
 
 ka (an adjectival suffix). 
 
 ta (having an ablative value and often used for 
 that case). 
 
 ta (adverbial suffix). 
 
 tha (having a local sense). 
 
 da (adverbial suffix). 
 
 na (adjectival suffix). 
 
 ra (adjectival suffix). 
 
 v^n, 'possessed of. ' 
 
33 
 
 PART III. 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 59. Although the Old Persian language can be 
 called syntactical, yet there exist many traces of that 
 loose and free construction (paratax) which is original 
 to speech. 
 
 USES OF THE NUMBERS. 
 
 60. One or two peculiar constructions call for 
 notice. 
 
 A. A collective noun in the singular often has the 
 government of a plural noun, both over a verb and a 
 
 pronoun; thus, imam bumim ty^^sham ad^m 
 
 Sithaham a.va akun^v^ta (NRa) 'This earth 
 
 what I commanded them (i. e., this earth) this was 
 done.' 
 
 B. The singular of the personal pronoun a.dam can 
 be expanded in a following clause into the plural; thus, 
 p<7tish mam h^m^r<^n^m c^rt^^n^iy p^sav^ hamaranam 
 akuma. (Bh. I, 19) 'to engage in battle against me, 
 afterwards we engaged in battle.' 
 
 C. The plural can be used for the dual; thus, 
 av<^thasham h^^m^r^in^m kartam. (Bh. II, 6) 'thus the 
 battle was fought by them.' (i. e., the army of Vi- 
 darna and the rebellious army); Anam^k^hy^ mahya 
 II r<3:uc^2:bish (Bh. I, 19) 'on the 2d day of the month 
 Anamaka' (lit., with two days). 
 
 USES OF THE CASES. 
 
 THE .NOMINATIVE. 
 
 61. The nominative is the case of the subject of 
 a finite verb, and of all words qualifying the subject, 
 both attributively, predicatively, and appositionally. 
 A few peculiar uses .ire^to be noticed. 
 
34 
 
 A. The nominative is used often in the weak syntax 
 common to the Old Iranian languages. Artificially it 
 can be explained as the subject of astiy supplied, the 
 idea being repeated in the form of a pronoun; thus, 
 m<^rtiy^ Frada na.ma a,vam m^thisht^m akun^v^(n)ta 
 (Bh. Ill, 3) 'a man, Frada by name, him they made 
 chief.' 
 
 Note i. The pronoun is sometimes omitted, leaving the nomina- 
 tive where the accusative of the direct object would be expected; 
 adrt'm fraishrzyrt-m Dad(7rsis nam<7 Parsrt^ mana. ha(n)daka (Bh. Ill, 2) 'I 
 sent forth my subject, Dadarsis by name, a Persian.' 
 
 Note 2. This free use of the nominative is shown in such expres- 
 sions as Kug^m<7krt nam^: vadanam (Bh. II, 3) 'there is a town, Ku- 
 ganaka by name; (lit. there is a town, [its] name is Kuganaka). That 
 na.ma is nominative, not accusative, is shown by the fact that it some- 
 times agrees in gender with the noun, if that be feminine, e. g., Sik- 
 aty^uvatish nama dida Nishaya namad^/hyaush (Bh. I, 13) 'there is a 
 stronghold, Sikatyauvatis by name; there is a country, Nishaya by 
 name. ' 
 
 B. The nominative is used in the predicate after a 
 verb in the middle voice which has the force of a pas- 
 sive; thus, hya 'Nah\ik(u)dracara ag^ub^ita (Bh. I, 19) 
 'who called himself (i. e. was called) Nabukudracara.* 
 
 THE VOCATIVE. 
 
 62. The vocative is the case of direct address. 
 The following peculiarity needs to be considered, 
 
 namely: The vocative of the personal pronoun tuv^m 
 is made indefinite by the insertion of the interrogative 
 ka in the same case; thus, tuv^m kahy^ ap^r^m imam 
 dipirrt v^inahy (Bh. IV, 15) *0 thou (whoever thou art) 
 who wilt hereafter see this inscription.' 
 
 THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 63. The accusative is the case of the direct object 
 of a verb, and of all words which qualify the object, 
 both attributively, predicately, and appositionally; 
 e. g. Aurrt-m^zda hy^ imam bumim ada (O.) *Aura- 
 mazda who created this earth.' 
 
35 
 
 64- Some verbs which allow two constructions 
 may take two accusatives, one in each construction; 
 e. g. , verbs of asking", taking, etc.; as ait« ad^m 
 Aur^m<?zdam j^diyamiy (NRa.) 'I beg this of Aura- 
 mazda.' khsh<i:tr<^mshim ad^m adin^m (Bh. I, 13). *I 
 took the kingdom from him.' 
 
 A. The verbs k<^r and da admit two accusatives, 
 one as object, the other as predicate; thus, hya Dara- 
 yava(h.)um. khshay^thiy<?m akun<2us. (O.) 'who made 
 Darius king;' h^uv D a.r ay av a (h.)um khshay^thiy^m 
 adrt:da (H.), *he has made Darius king.' 
 
 B. A few verbs strengthen the verbal notion by 
 adding their past passive participle, which becomes an 
 accusative in agreement with the direct object; thus, 
 av^m (h)ub«rt<^m aharam (Bh. I, 8) 'I supported him 
 well; (lit, him well supported I supported.)' 
 
 65. The accusative can follow nouns which have 
 such a verbal character that they share the construc- 
 tion of a verb; thus, Aur^m^^'zda thuvam d<2usta biya 
 (Bh. IV, 16) 'may Auramazda be a friend to you.' 
 
 66. The accusative stands as the limit of motion, 
 b)oth with and without a preposition; thus, y^tha mam 
 kam« (Bh. IV, 4) 'as the wish (came) to me' (i. e. as 
 my wish was); a.dam (karam) iraishayam Uvajam, 
 (Bh. I, 17) *I sent an army to Susiana;' K^(m)bujiy^ 
 Mudrayam ashiy^va (Bh. I, 10) 'Cambyses went to 
 Egypt;' (karam) fraish^y^ abiy Vivan^zm (Bh. Ill, 9) 
 'he sent the army to Vivana.' 
 
 67. The accusative expresses extent and duration, 
 both with and without a preposition; thus, khsh<2p^va 
 raucapativa ava akun^v^y^ta (Bh. I, 7) 'this was done 
 day and night.* 
 
36 
 
 A. The time in which an action took place seems 
 to have been expressed at times by the accusative. 
 One case occurs in the inscriptions; Garmapadahya 
 mahya I rauca th^k^ta ah^ av^thasham h^m^r^n^zm 
 kartam (Bh. Ill, I.) *on the first day of the month 
 Garmapada then it was that thus the battle was fought 
 by them.' This idiom appears occasionally in San- 
 skrit. 
 
 68. The accusative of specification defines the ap- 
 plication of a noun; thus, h^ca Pirav^; nam^ rauta 
 (SZb.) 'from a river, the Nile by name.' Cf. 6i, A. 
 n. 2. 
 
 THE INSTRUMENTAL. 
 
 69. The instrumental is the case denoting associa- 
 tion and accompaniment originally, and as a derived 
 notion, instrument and means. 
 
 70. The instrumental of accompaniment usually 
 takes the preposition h<2da; thus, aish^ hada, kara (Bh. 
 I, 19) *he went with his army.' 
 
 A. In enumeration the instrumental may be used 
 in the sense of association, when the same case as the 
 preceding nouns would be expected; thus abacr/ris 
 g^ith^mca maniy^mca v(i)thibishca .... avastayr/m 
 (Bh. I, 14) *I restored the commerce and the cattle 
 and the dwellings and together with the clans' (i. e. , 
 and the clans.) 
 
 71. The instrumental of means or instrument is 
 very frequent; thus, v<7shna Aur^m^zdah^ (Bh. I, 5.) 
 *by the grace of Auramazda.' ardrtistan^ . . . .vithiya 
 karta (L.) 'the lofty structure was made by the clan.' 
 
 72. The prosecutive instrumental denotes the as- 
 sociation of time with an event; thus, Viy<7khn^?h\a 
 mahya XIV r^uc^bish th<3:k^ta aha y^diy udirpat^rta 
 
37 
 
 (Bh. I, ii) 'on the 14th day of the month Viyakhna, 
 then it was when he rose up (lit. in connection with iz^ 
 days).' Cf. 6j, A. 
 
 73. The instrumental is sometimes used in the 
 sense of the locative, denoting the point in space; thus, 
 ad(a;mshim'gathva avastay^'m (Bh. I, 14) 'I put it in its 
 place.' m^na data ap^riyayrt(n) (Bh. I, 8) 'they fol- 
 lowed in my law.' v<^siy aniy^sciy n^ib^^m k^rt^m 
 ana Parsa (D.) 'there is many another beautiful work 
 in this Persia.' 
 
 THE DATIVE. 
 
 74. The dative case has no existence in Old Per- 
 sian, its place being taken by the genitive. 
 
 THE ABLATIVE. 
 
 75. The use of the ablative is to express separa- 
 tion or distinction. The preposition h^ca is usually 
 joined to this case. 
 
 'j^. The ablative denotes issue, removal, release, 
 and like relations; thus, khsh^tr^m tya h^ca amakh^rm 
 t^umaya p<^rabrtrt<7m ah<7 (Bh. I, 14) 'the kingdom 
 which was taken from our family.' h^uv hrtcam<3 
 hrtmitriy^ ab^v^ (Bh. Ill, 5) 'he became estranged 
 (rebellious) from me.' 
 
 A. The notion of this ablative passes over to that 
 of cause; thus, kar^shim h^ca d^rsh^m^ at^irs^ (Bh. I, 
 13) 'the state feared him on account of (hisj violence.' 
 
 j'j. The ablative expresses defense, which is a de- 
 velopment of the idea of removal; thus, h^ca dn^uga 
 p^tip^y^zuva (Bh. IV, 5) 'protect yourself from deceit.' 
 imam d^hyaum Aur^m<7zda patuv h^ca h<?inaya h^ca 
 d(u)shiyara h^ca dr<^uga (H.) 'may Auramazda pro- 
 tect this province from an army, from failure of crops, 
 and from deceit.' 
 
38 
 
 A. The ablative follows tars, to fear. Such an 
 ablative contains this same idea of removal (i. e., re- 
 coil from a dread object), h^ca aniy^na ma t^rs^m 
 (I) 'let me not fear a foe.' 
 
 78. The ablative is the case of comparison. This 
 use is simply a special application of its original no- 
 tion of distinction; thus, a.pataram haca. Parsa (NRa) 
 'another than a Persian' (lit. another from a Persian.) 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 79. The true use of the genitive is to qualify 
 a noun with the same powers as the adjective enjoys. 
 The genitive, however, did not remain restricted to 
 this adjectival construction, but is employed with 
 verbs and adjectives. 
 
 80. The subjective genitive, including the author 
 and possessor, expresses the subject of the action; 
 thus v<3:shna Auramazdaha ad^m khshay(3:thiy<3: amiy 
 (Bh. I, 5) 'by the grace of Auramazda, I am king.^ 
 
 A. The genitive regularly follows kartamy perhaps 
 on account of a substantive idea in the participle; 
 thus, av^thasham hamaranam k^rt^m (Bh. Ill, 10) 
 *thus the battle was fought by them.' 
 
 Note. The genitive expressing means is found in Sanskrit. 
 
 B. The genitive follows p^sa; thus, kar^ Pars^ 
 p^sa mana. ashiy^v^ (Bh. Ill, 6) 'The Persian army 
 followed me.' 
 
 C. The genitive expresses manner; thus, hama- 
 hyaya th^rd^ (Bh. IV, 7) 'in every way.' 
 
 81. The partitive genitive denotes the whole of 
 which a portion is taken; thus, ad^m Dar^y/?v<7(h)ush 
 khshayrt:thiy^ khshay^thiyanam (Bh. I, i) 'I am Da- 
 rius, the king of kings.' 
 
39 
 
 A. The genitive is dependent on an adjective 
 (especially a superlative) which has substantival char- 
 acter enough to allow a partitive construction; thus 
 Aurrt:m<2zda hya m^thisht^ b^ganam (F.) 'Auramazda, 
 who is the greatest of the gods.' 
 
 82. The objective genitive, which designates the 
 noun as the object of the action, occurs nowhere in 
 the inscriptions. 
 
 83. The datival genitive expresses the indirect 
 object; thus, kar<3;hya avrt:tha athaha (Bh. I, 16) 'thus 
 he said to the state.' Auram^zda khsh<a:tr<3:m m<^na 
 ivdhara (Bh. I, 5) 'Auramazda gave the kingdom to 
 me.' 
 
 Note. This use is simply a pregnant construction of the posses- 
 sive genitive; e. g., khsh(7tr(?m mrt'na irabara, he gave the kingdom to 
 me (made it mine by giving). This same power of the genitive is 
 shared by the Prakrit and the late Sanskrit. 
 
 A. The verb duruj, ''to deceive,' is followed by 
 the genitive once in the inscriptions; elsewhere it 
 governs the accusative. Kar^hya av<3:tha adurujiy^ 
 Bh. I, 1 1 'thus he deceived the people.' 
 
 B. The genitive enclitic sham follows a.]anam in 
 place of the accusatfve of direct object in Bh. IV, 2 
 ad^msham aj^n<3:m, T smote them,' and patiyakshaiy 
 NRa. 
 
 THE LOCATIVE. 
 
 84. The locative is the case denoting location and 
 condition. The locative expresses situation, both 
 with and without a preposition; thus, ad^m khsha- 
 y^thiy^ Pars^iy (Bh. I, i) *I am king in Persia.' hy^ 
 Mad^ishuva m<3:thisht^ aha Bh. II, 6 *who was great- 
 est among the Medes.' vardanam anuv Ufr<2t<a:uva 
 (Bh. 1,(19) 'a town on the Euphrates.' 
 
 A. The locative takes the place of the instrumen- 
 tal in the expression nip^diy, 'on foot;' e.g., atiyaish^. 
 
40 
 
 passiva Vivan^ hada, kara nip^^diy (Bh. Ill, 1 1) *after- 
 wards Vivana followed with his army on foot.' 
 
 B. The locative can take the place of the partitive 
 genitive; thus, Mad^ishuv^ m^thishta (Bh. II, 6) 'the 
 greatest among the Medes.' 
 
 THE PECULIARITIES OF THE INSCRIPTIONS OF AR- 
 TAXERXES MNEMON AND ARTAXERXES OCHUS. 
 
 85. These inscriptions exhibit such careless irreg- 
 ularities that they call for special treatment. 
 
 A. The nominative is attracted into the case of the 
 preceding noun, although the predicate appears in the 
 nominative; thus,thatiy Art^khshrttraDar<3:y^v^(h)ush- 
 ahya. khshay<2thiy<2:hya putr<2 Dar ay av a (h.)ushahy a. Ar- 
 takhsh<2thrahya khshay^thiy<3:hya putr<3! (S.) 'says 
 Artaxerxes, the son of Darius, the king ; Darius 
 (was) the son of Artaxerxes, the king.' 
 
 B. The nominative appears for the accusative with 
 a qualifying pronoun in the accusative; im^m ap^dana 
 (S.) '(Darius made) this structure.' 
 
 C. The genitive is attracted into the case of the 
 subject or the predicate nominative and appears in 
 the nominative; thus, Art<3:khsh^tra Dar^y^v^(h)ush 
 khshay^thiy^ putr^ (P.) 'Artaxerxes, son of Darius, 
 the king.' 
 
 D. The nominative is thrust into the accusative, 
 yet the passive construction is retained; thus, im^m 
 usat^sh^nam atha(n)g«nam mam upa mam k^^rta (P.) 
 'this stone lofty structure was built by me for myself.' 
 
 E. The accusative expresses means, taking the 
 place of the regular genitive construction after k^rt^m; 
 thus, ty^ mam k^rta (P.) 'what was done by me.' 
 
 F. A substantive in the singular takes its partici- 
 ple in the plural; thus, tya mam k<3:rta (P.) 'what was 
 done by me.' 
 
41 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 86. The adjective and the participle agree with the 
 substantive in gender, number, and case. 
 A few peculiar cases are to be noticed. 
 
 A. The adjective can be hardened into a neuter 
 substantive and in this way enter into the relation of 
 an appositive or a predicate noun; thus, ciyk^^r^m ava 
 dahysLva (NRa.) 'beautiful are the regions (lit. a beauty 
 these regions are), h^uv kamanam a.ha (Bh. II, 6) 
 'that was faithful (lit. a faithful thing).' 
 
 B. The adjective is used, most often in the singu- 
 lar, to take the place of the name of a country; thus, 
 Pars^, 'Persia (lit. Persian).' Mad^, Media (lit. Me- 
 dian).' 
 
 Note i. Sometimes the plural occurs, and in a few cases alter- 
 nates with the singular; thus, Yauna and Yauna (NRa) 'Ionia (Jit. 
 Ionian and lonians).' 
 
 Note 2. The real name of the country appears a few times; thus, 
 Uvarazmish (NRa.), Harauvatish (Bh. I, 6). 
 
 C. The noun vith, 'clan,' when used apposition- 
 ally takes the place of the regular adjective vithiy^ai; 
 thus, h<2da v(i)thibish b<3:g^ibish (H.) 'with (his) fellow 
 gods (lit. with the gods [namely his] fellows).' 
 
 D. In the inscriptions of Artaxerxes Ochus the 
 masculine of the pronoun agrees with the feminine 
 noun; thus, im^m us^t^sh^nam (P.) 'this lofty struc- 
 ture.' 
 
 I 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 87. The demonstrative pronouns av^ and h^uv 
 supply the place of the third personal pronoun. 
 
 88. The relative pronoun ty^, beside enjoying its 
 ordinary functions, has the following important uses: 
 
 A. The relative pronoun frequently serves to con- 
 nect the noun with whatever qualifies it, either appo- 
 
42 
 
 sitionally, adjectively, adverbially, genitively, or loca- 
 tively. In this capacity its independent character is lost 
 and it agrees with its antecedent, not only in gender and 
 number but also in case, thus becoming the equivalent 
 of the Greek article; thus, v(i)th<2m tyam amakh^m 
 (Bh. I. 14) 'the clan of ours. ' ty^na m<2na data (Bh. I, 
 8) *in my law.' khsh^tr<^m ty^ Babir^uv (Bh. I, 16) 
 'the kingdom at Babylon.' kar^m tyam Mad^m (Bh. 
 II, 6) 'the Median army.' Nabuk(u)dr^c«r« amiy hy^ 
 Nabunit^hya putr*^; (Bh. II, 16) 'I am Nabukudracara 
 the son of Nabunita.' 
 
 B. The relative can be used in the place of a demon- 
 strative; thus, kar^m fraish^y^m ty^ip<a:tiy (Bh. II, 13) 
 <I sent an army against these.' 
 
 USES OF THE VOICES. 
 
 89. There are (as in Sanskrit) two voices, active 
 and middle. The passive notion is conveyed through 
 the middle Voice by means of a definite class-sign. 
 
 One or two peculiar constructions call for notice. 
 
 A. The active with direct object can take the place 
 of the middle; thus, thuvam msitya durujiyahy (Bh. 
 IV, 6) *do not deceive yourself.' 
 
 B. The middle without the passive sign sometimes 
 contains the passive signification; thus, hy^ N^buk(u)- 
 dracara ag^ub^ta (Bh. I 19) 'who was called (lit. 
 called himself) Nabukudracara. 'agrtrbay^ta(Bh. II, 13) 
 «he was taken.' an^yata (Bh. I, 17) 'he was led.' 
 
 C. The passive participle of neuter verbs has no 
 passive notion, but simply an indefinite past tense; 
 thus hrt(n)gmrtta (Bh. II, 7) 'having come together.' 
 
43 
 
 USES OF THE MOODS. 
 
 THE INDICATIVE. 
 
 90. The indicative is used in the recital of facts. 
 
 THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 91. The subjunctive has a general future meaning, 
 denoting what is possible and probable. This use is 
 perhaps the historic one from which the nicer and 
 more elaborate values of this mood in the cognate 
 languages have been developed; thus, tuvam ka hya 
 aparam imam dipim p^tip^^rsahy (Bh. IV, 6) *0 thou 
 who wilt hereafter examine this inscription.' 
 
 A. Conditional sentences introduced by y^diy, 'if, 
 take their verbs in the subjunctive; thus yadiy avatha. 
 m<3:niyahy (Bh. IV, 5) 'if thus thou thinkest.' 
 
 B. Purpose clauses introduced by y^tha, 'in order 
 that', take their verbs in the subjunctive; thus, yatha. 
 khshnasahy (NRa.) 'in order that you may know.' 
 
 C. The negative maty*^; (ma and ty^) denoting pur- 
 pose or warning takes the subjunctive; thus, maty^ 
 mam khshnasatiy (Bh. I, 1 3) 'that (the state) may not 
 know me.' 
 
 D. The subjunctive with the negative ma.tya is 
 used to express prohibition, less peremptory than the 
 imperative, more so than the optative; thus, p^tik<a:ra 
 Tn^tya visanahy (Bh. IV, 15) 'thou shalt not destroy 
 (these) pictures.' 
 
 E. The temporal conjunction yava takes the sub- 
 junctive in its ordinary future sense ; thus, yava 
 t^uma ah^tiy (Bh. IV, 16) 'as long as (thy) family 
 shall be.' 
 
 THE OPTATIVE. 
 
 92. The optative denotes what is desired, in 
 which capacity it is the equivalent of a mild impera- 
 tive. In a weakened sense it denotes what may or 
 can be. 
 
44 
 
 A. The optative with the negative particle ma 
 expresses a desired negation, not direct prohibition ; 
 thus, utat^iy t^uma ma biya (Bh. IV, li) 'may there 
 not be a family of thine.' 
 
 THE IMPERATIVE. 
 
 93. The imperative expresses a command or a 
 desire; thus, paraidiy av^m j^diy (Bh. II, 7) *go, 
 smite that (army).' 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 94. The infinitive, in its fundamental and usual 
 sense, expresses purpose, as the dative infinitive of the 
 Veda. It has also become employed in a freer sense 
 as the simple complement of a verb ; thus, ais^ h^^da 
 kara p^tish mam hamaranam cartanaiy (Bh. I, 19) 
 'he went with (his) army against me to engage in 
 battle,' kasciy naly ad^rshn^ush cisciy th<^st^n^iy 
 p<3:riy G^^umat^m (Bh. I, 13) 'no one dared to say 
 anything against Gaumata.* 
 
 USES OF THE TENSES. 
 95. A few peculiar uses deserve notice. 
 
 A. The present with diivita.taranam denotes that 
 the action was begun in the past and continues in the 
 present. This peculiarity is to be compared with the 
 Latin use of the present with iam diu, etc. 
 
 B. The indicative forms of the imperfect and 
 aorist appear without augment. With the loss of 
 this augment the imperfect and aorist sacrifice their 
 own peculiar character and take on other notions. 
 After ma prohibitive the sense is that of a subjunc- 
 tive or optative ; thus, h^ca aniyana ma t^rs^m (I.) 
 * may I not fear an enemy. ' 
 
45 
 
 C. Yata in the sense of "while" takes the imper- 
 fect; in the sense of ''until" it takes either the imper- 
 fect or aorist. 
 
 D. The passive participle, both with and without 
 an auxiliary verb, is used in the sense of a passive 
 perfect; thus, amata am^hy (Bh. I, 3) 'we have been 
 tested (or prolonged).' B^rdiy^ av^j<2:t^ (Bh. I, lo) 
 'Bardiya was slain.' 
 
 DEPENDENT CLAUSES. 
 
 96. Final Clauses. Cf. 91, B. and C. 
 
 97. Consecutive Clauses. Tya (the neuter of the 
 relative) introduces clauses expressing result, and 
 takes the verb in the indicative ; thus, dr<^ug^dish 
 h<7mitriya akun^ush ty^ im^iy kar^m adurujiy^sh<3:(n) 
 (Bh. IV, 4) 'a lie made them rebellious so that they 
 deceived the people.' 
 
 98. Conditional Clauses. Cf. 91, A. 
 
 99. Causal Clauses. Y^tha expressing cause 
 takes the verb in the indicative ; thus, Aur/^m<a:zda 
 
 up<i:stam ahara y<3:tha n^iy arik<a; ah<^m (Bh. IV, 
 
 13) 'Auramazda gave aid, because I was not un- 
 friendly.' 
 
 100. Temporal Clauses. 
 
 A. Y^tha, "while," takes the indicative; "in 
 order that," the subjunctive. 
 
 B. Yata, Cf. 95, C. 
 
 C. Yava, "as long as," prefers the subjunctive. 
 Cf. 91, E. 
 
 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 
 
 101. A form of indirect narrative is hardly devel- 
 oped in the language. Statements are expressed 
 
46 
 
 usually in the most simple direct manner; thus, yadiy 
 av^^tha m^niyahy d^hyaushm^iy duruva ah<2tiy (Bh. 
 IV, 5) 'if thus thou thinkest, may my country be safe.' 
 
 A. This influence of the direct form of statement 
 is felt often by the pronoun in a dependent clause; 
 thus, kar<3:m avaj^niya maty^man khshnasatiy (Bh. I, 
 13) 'he would smite the people that they may not 
 know him (lit. that they may not know me)'; the idea 
 being expressed as it was conceived in the mind of the 
 author. 
 
 B. A tendency towards indirect discourse is mani- 
 fested by the use of the neuter of the relative ty^; 
 thus, kar<^hya n^iy azda ab^v^ ty^ B^rdiy^ av^j^t^ 
 (Bh. I, 10) 'there was ignorance on the part of the 
 state that Bardiya was slain.' 
 
 Note. The relative pronoun yat in Sanskrit appears to have a few 
 times this same function. I refer to a case I have met recently in my 
 reading, namely in the Khandogya Upanishad. 
 
 COMPOUNDS. 
 
 102. Copulative. The composition of two nouns 
 in coordinate construction as if connected by the con- 
 junction "and" does not appear in the inscriptions. 
 
 103. Determinative. The composition of two 
 words, the former of which qualifies the second, either 
 as a noun in case relation, adjective, or verb, occurs; 
 thus, sarastiharaf 'having bows', Aur^m^zda, SLsahara, 
 etc. 
 
 104. Adjective. The determinative compound by 
 assuming the idea of • 'possessing" becomes an adjec- 
 tive; thus, Art^khshatr^j, 'Artaxerxes* (as a determi- 
 
47 
 
 native, 'lofty kingdom'; as an adjective compound, 
 ^'possessing a lofty kingdom'.) zurakara, 'possessing 
 power as action', (h)uv^sp«, paruzana, etc. 
 
 Note. The compound paruzana has its two members separated, yel 
 preserves the meaning and value of a compound; thus, paruv zananan 
 
 (Ca) (Cb) (K). 
 
 I02. Prepositional. The composition of two 
 words, the former of which is a preposition governing 
 the second, is found often; thus, passLva, 'after this', 
 taradaraya patipadam iraharvamf etc. 
 
48 
 
 A complete classification of all the verb-forms oc- 
 ring in the Old Persian language, 
 
 Aj (?), drive. (See vocabulary.) 
 Impf. 3. s., Sijata. 
 
 Akhsh (?), see. (See vocabulary.) 
 Impf. I. s., akhsh<2iy. 
 
 Ah. be. 
 Pres. I. s., amiy; 2. s., ahy, 3. s., astiy; 1. p.; 
 am^hy: 3. p., h^(n)tiy; 3. s., ah^tiy(subj.). Impf. i. 
 s., ah^m; 3. s., ah^; 3. p., ah^(n); 3. p. (middle) 
 ah^(n)ta, (ah^[n]t^). 
 
 Av^h, ask aid. 
 Impf. (middle) I. s., avahaiy. 
 
 I> go- 
 Pres. 3. £., aitiy; 2. s., idiy (impv.); 2. p. ; ita (impv.) 
 Impf. I. s., ay^m, 3 p., ay^(n). Aor. 3. s., aish^; 3. 
 p.,aish^(n).Part., ita 
 
 Ish, send. 
 Impf. I. s, aiishayam 3. s., aish^zy^. 
 
 K^n, dig. 
 Pres. 3. s., k^(n)tuv (impv.). Impf. I. s., ak^n^m; 
 3. s., ak^. Aor. (passive) 3. s., ak^niy. Inf. k<3:(n)- 
 t^n^iy. 
 
 J^ar, do. 
 
 Pres. 2. s., kun^vahy (subj.), k^rahy (subj.) 2. s. 
 k^ra (impv.) Impf. i. s., akun^^v^m; 3. s., akun^iush, 
 (akunash: S), i. p., akuma, 3. p. akun^v^(n), 3. s. 
 (middle) akun^v^ta, 3. p. akun^va(n)ta, (akuta), 3. s. 
 (passive) akun^vy^ta; Perf. 3. s. c^khriya (opt.). Inf. 
 cartanaiy; Part k^rt^. 
 
OF run. 
 
 XTNIVERSITT 
 
 Khshi (?), rule. (See vocabulary.) 
 Impf. (middle) i. s, akhsh^iy. 
 
 Khshnas, know. 
 
 Pres. 2. s. khshnasahy (subj.), 3. s. khshnasatiy 
 (subj.) 
 
 Gam, go. 
 Aor. 3. s. gm^ta, 3. s. jamiya (opt). Part gmata. 
 
 Garb, seize. 
 Impf. I. s. a.garha.yam, 3. s., agarhaya, 3. p. ag^r- 
 bay<3:(n), 3. s. (middle) ag^bayata, 
 
 Gud, hide. 
 Pres. 2. s. g<^ud^yahy (subj.); Impf. 3, s. agaudaya, 
 
 Gub, speak. 
 Pres. (middle) 3. s. g^ubd:t^iy, 3. s. g^ubat<3:iy 
 (subj.); Impf. 3. s. ag^ub^ta. 
 
 Jady ask. 
 Pres. I. s. j^^diyamiy, 3. s. j<^d<2:n^utuv (impv.) 
 
 ]an, smite. 
 Pres, 2. s. jadiy (impv.), 2. p. j^ta (impv.) j^niya 
 (opt.); Impf. I s. ajanam, 3. s. aj^, 3 p. a]ana (n); 
 Part. j<2t^. 
 
 Jiv, live. 
 Pres. 2. s. jiv^hy, 2. s. jiva (impv.) 
 
 T^khsh, fashion. 
 Impf. (middle) I s. at^khsh^iy, 3. s. at^khsh^ta, 3. 
 p. at^khsha(n)ta. 
 
 TaVy cross. 
 Impf. I s. at^r^(m?) (Bh. V, 4) 3. s., at^r^ (t^rti- 
 yana.?), i. p. atarayama; Part. t^rt^. 
 
so 
 
 T^rs, fear. 
 Pres. 3. s. tarsatiy; Impf, i. s. ditarsam, 3. s. atarsa. 
 
 Thad, go.(?) 
 Impf. 2. s. Sithadaya. 
 
 Th<3:h, say. 
 Pres. 2. s. thahy, 3. s. thatiy, I. p, (passive) th^h- 
 yam^hy; Impf. i, s. ath^zh^m, 3. s. athaha; Aor. (pas- 
 sive) 3. s. ath<a:hi; Inf. thastanaiy. 
 
 Trar, guard. 
 Impf. I. s. atrarayam. 
 
 Dan, flow. 
 Pres. 3. s. danauvatiy. 
 
 Dar, hold. 
 Pres. I. s. dar<2yamiy; Impf. 3. s. adaraya; Aor. 
 (passive) 3. s. adariy (adary, adari). 
 
 D<3:rsh, dare. 
 Pres. (middle) I. s, d^rsh^iy; Impf. 3. s. ad<2rsh- 
 n^ush. 
 
 1. Da, know. 
 Impf. 3, s. adana. 
 
 2. Da, put. 
 
 Impf. 3. s. ad^da; Aor. 3. s. ada, ad^da. 
 
 3. Da, give. 
 Pres. 3. s. d^datuv (impv,) 
 
 I. Di, see. 
 Pres, 2. s. didiy (impv.) 
 
 2. Di, take. 
 Impf. I. s. adin^m, 3. s. adina; Part. dit^. 
 
51 
 
 Duruj, deceive. 
 Pres. 2. s. durujiyahy (subj. ;) Impf. 3. s. adurujiya, 
 3. p. adurujiy^sh<7(n); Part, durukht^. 
 
 Duv<^r, make. (?) 
 Part, duvarta. 
 
 Ni, lead. 
 Impf. I. s. a.nayam, 3. s. anayay 3. s. (middle) an^- 
 y^ta. 
 
 Fat, fall. 
 Impf. 3. s. (middle) apatata. 
 
 Vars, examine. 
 Pres. 2. s. p<^rsahy (subj.) 3. s. p<^rsatiy (subj.) 
 p«rsa (impv.); Impf. i. s. ap<2:rs^m; Part, fr^^st^. 
 
 Pa, protect. 
 Pres. 2. s. padiy (impv.), 3. s. patuv (impv,,) 2. s. 
 (middle) p^y^uva (impv.) Part. pat^. 
 
 Pish, rub. 
 Impf. 1. s. apish<^m; Inf. pishtrt:n<3:iy; Part, pisht^. 
 
 B<7(n)d, bind. 
 Part. b^st^. 
 
 Bar, bear. 
 Pres. 3. p. b<3:rrt:(n)tiy, haratya?, 3. s. b^r^tuv (impv.); 
 Impf. I. s. abaram, 3. s. ab^ra 3. p. ab^ra(n), 3. p. 
 (middle) ab^r«(n)ta; Part, barta. 
 
 Bu, be. 
 Pres. 3. s. b^vatiy (subj.); Impf. i. s. ahavam, 3. 
 s. ab^va, 3. p. abava(n); Aor. 3. s. biya (Opt.) 
 
 M^n, think. 
 Pres. 3. s. maniyatiy (subj.) 
 
 M^n, remain. 
 Impf, 3. s. 3imanaya. 
 
52 
 
 M^r, die. 
 Impf. (middle) 3. s. am^riy^ta. 
 
 Ma, measure. 
 Part. mat^. 
 
 R^d, leave.C?) 
 Impf. 2. s. Sitada. 
 
 KaSy come. 
 Pres, 3. s. r<3:satiy (subj.); Impf. i. s. ar^s^m, 3. s. 
 ar^s<3:. 
 
 Vain, see. 
 Pres. 2. s. v^inahy (subj.) 3. s. (middle) vainataiy; 
 Impf. 3. s. divaina. 
 
 Vaj, lead. 
 Impf. I. s. avajam. 
 
 Yar, cause to believe. 
 Pres. 3. s. v^rn^vatiy (subj.) 3. s. (middle) warna- 
 v^tam (impv.) 
 
 S^n, destroy. 
 Pres. 2. s. s^nahy (subj.) 
 
 S^r, kill.(?) 
 Impf. (middle) 3. s. as^riy^ta. 
 
 St^r, sin. 
 Impf. 2. s. astarava. 
 
 Sta, stand. 
 Impf. 3. s. aisht<3:ta, 1. s. astay^m, 3. s. astay^. 
 
 Shiyu, go. 
 Impf. I. s. ashiy^v^m, 3. s. ashiy^v^, 3. p. ashiy^j- 
 v^(n). 
 
 H^(n)j, throw. 
 Impf. I. s. ah^(n)j^m. 
 
 H^d, sit. 
 Impf. I. s. ahad<2y^m. 
 
TRANSLITERATION 
 
 OF 
 
 THE INSCRIPTIONS 
 
 I. 
 
 INSCRIPTION OF CYRUS. 
 
 INSCRIPTION OF MURGHAB. (m.) 
 
 *Ad^m *Kurush ^khshay^aithiy^?; ^HakhRmanishiya. 
 
 lAdara. 36. 2Kurush, IC. ^khshay/^thiya. 18. '•H^kham^ni- 
 shiyrt, 58. 
 
II. 
 
 INSCRIPTIONS OF DARIUS HYSTASPES. 
 
 THE INSCRIPTION OF BEHISTAN. (BH. ) 
 
 1. Adam Dar^y<3:V(3:(h)ush* khshayathiya vazraka 
 khshay(3:thiy^ khshay^thiyanam khshay^thiy^ Pars^^iy 
 khshay^thiy^ M^hyunam V(i)shthasp(^hya putm Ar- 
 sham^hya 'naps. H^kham^nishiy<3:. 2. ^Thatiy Data- 
 y^v<3:(h)ush khshay^thiy^ mam, '^pita V(i)shtasp^ 
 V(i)shtasp<2hya pita Arsham^ Arsham^hya pita Ariya- 
 ramna Ariyaramn^^hya pita [C^ishpish] ^C^ishpaisb 
 pita H^kham^nish. 3, Thatiy Dar<3:y^v^(h)ush 
 khshay^thiy^ av^hy^radiy vayam H^kham^nishiya 
 ^th^hyam^hy haca. ^p^ruviy<7t<^ ^amata ^am^hy haca 
 p<^ruviy^t<3^ "hya amakh^m "t^uma khshay<2thiya 
 dLha(n). 4:. Thatiy Dar^y<2v^(h)ush khshay<^thiy<3; 
 VIII m<3;na t^umaya ty<3!iy paruvam khshay^thiya 
 ah^(n) adam navamalXduvita.tarnam vayam khshay^- 
 thiya am^hy, 5. Thatiy Dar^y^v<2(h)ush khshay^- 
 thiy<3: v<2shna "Auramazdaha adam khshay^thiy^j: amiy 
 Aur<3:m^zda khsh«tr<2m '^m^^na irahara. 6. Thatiy 
 Dar<3:y^v<3:(h)ush khshay^thiy^ ^'*ima d<^hyav^ tya mana 
 '5prt'tiyaish(3;(n) v^jshna Aur<7m^zdah(3; '"ad^msham 
 khshay^thiy^ ah^m Pars^ (H)uv^j^ Babirush Athura 
 
 *The author not feeling ready to accept the theory of Linder 
 (Literar. Centralblatt, 18S0, p. 358) respecting the derivation of the 
 second member of the compound (cf. Spiegel: Die Altpersischen Keil- 
 inschriften, 2nd edition) retained the old spelling 4-vush in his first 
 edition. The otherwise anomalous genitive +vah<7ush has induced 
 him to transliterate +v<7(h)ush. See vocabulary. 
 
 id^hyunam, 21. ^^^pa, 23. "thatiy, 15; 39, V. "pita, 22. 
 'C<zishpaish, 20. ®thrthyamr?hy, 45, b. ^p^ruviyrttfl, 58. ^amata, 
 95, D. •amahy 40 (end)- i^hya, 30; 87, a. ^U^uma, 21. ^^Aura- 
 mflzdaha, 19. ^'mana, 83. ^*ima, 28. i''prttiyaishrt(n), 48. *«ad«m- 
 sham. 29. 
 
55 
 
 Arahaya Mudray^ tyaly darayahya, Sp^rd<3! Y^una 
 Mad^ Arming Katapatuka Tarthava Zara(n)ka Harai- 
 va Vvsirazamiya Bakhtrish Sugud^ G^(n)dar^ Saka 
 Thatagush H^r<a:uv^tish Maka haharvam dahyava 
 XXIII. 7. Thatiy Dar^y^v^(h)ush khshay^^thiy^ 
 ima dahydiva tya mana pat{y3iisha(n) v^shna Aur^- 
 mazdaha m^na b^(n)d^ka aha(n)ta. mana. 'bajim ^a.ba- 
 r^(n)ta ty^sham h^cam^ ath^hy khsh^p<3;va raucapa- 
 tiva ^ava *a,kunavyata. 8. Thatiy Dar^y<3:v^(h)ush 
 khshay^thiy<3; a(n)t^r ima d^hyav<3: martiya hya ag^ta 
 aha avam ^(h)ub<^rt^m ab^r^m hya arik<^ ah^: av^m 
 (h)uirastam ap<^rs^m v<3:shna Aur^m^zdah^ ima da- 
 hyav^ ty^na m^na data ap<3;riyay^(n) y<^thasham ha- 
 cam^ ^ath^hy av<3;tha ^akun^vy^^ita. 9. Thatiy Dara- 
 yava(h)ush khshay<3:thiy<^ Aur<^m^zda m<3:na khsh<i:tr^m 
 irahara Aur<^m(^zdam^iy up^stam ^ahara 'yata im^ 
 khsh<^tr<3;m *°adary v^shna Aur^m^zdah^ im^ khsh^- 
 tr^m "dar<^yamiy. 10. Thatiy Dar<2y^v^(h)ush 
 
 khshay<^thiy<3: im<2: ty<3; m<?na "k^rt^m pasava y^itha 
 khshay<7thiy^ ab<3:v^m Ka(m)huyiya nama Kur<7ush 
 putva amakh<2m t<2umaya ^^hauv p^ruv^m ida khshay^- 
 thiy<^ aha avrt:hya K<^(m)buj iy<^hya brata B^rdiy*^ ''^nam^ 
 aha h^mata h<3;m(3:pita K<3:(m)bujiy<2hya pasava Ka(m)- 
 bujiy^ av^m B<2rdiy<3:m ^^avaja y^^tha Krt'(m)bujiy^ 
 B<3:rdiy<3:m avaj^ kar^hya n^iy azda ahava tya B^^rdiy^^; 
 ava]ata pasava K<3:(m)buji}^ Mudrayrt-m ashiy<^v<3: 
 y^tha Krt'(m)bujiy^ Mudray^m ashiy^v^ pasava kara 
 arik^ ab^^v^ pasava drauga d^hy^uva v^siy ab^v^ uta 
 Pars^iy uta Mad^iy uta aniyauva d^hyushuva. 
 11. Thatiy T) ar ay av a (h)ush khshay^thiy^ pasava I 
 mrtrtiy<^ M^^gush ah<^ G<2umat<2 nam^ h^uv ud<3:p^t<7:ta 
 h<3;ca P^ishiyauvadaya Ar<3:k^drish nama k<3:uf^ haca. 
 
 1 bajim. 20. * a.haTa{n)ta, 44, 2. ^ ^va, 27. ■* akun^vyata, 45, 
 N. 3. s (h)ub^?rt^m, 64, b. « athahy, 45, N. 4; 50. N. ^ akun^v- 
 yrtta, 42. ^ abara, 44. ® yata, 95. 1° adary, 50. ^ ^ danzyamiy 46 
 i2kflrtam, 53. i^hauv, 28. i ^ nama, 23, b. - - 
 
56 
 
 Sivadasha Yiyakhnahya mahya XIV ' r<3;uc^bish tha- 
 katSL oha yadiy udayatata. hauv karahyd. av^tha 'adu- 
 rujiy^ a.dam B^rdiy^ amiy hya Kur^ush putr^ K^(m)- 
 bujiy^hya brata pasa.va kara haruva h^mitriy^ ab^v^ 
 h^ca K^(m)bujiya abiy SLvam ashiy^v<3! uta Tarsa uta 
 Mad<3: uta aniya d^hyav^ khsh^tr<3:m h^uv 3.garha.yata. 
 Garmapadahya mahya IX r<^uc^bish th^ik^ta aha 
 av^tha khsh(3;tr<3:m agarhayata pasava 'Ka(^m)hu]iya 
 (h)uvam^rshiyush am^riy^ta. 12. Thatiy Damy^- 
 v^(h)ush khshay^thiy^ aita khsh<2tr^m tya G<3:umata ^ 
 hya Magush ^adina K«(m)bujiy«m aita khsh^tr^m 
 h^ca paruvlyata amakh<2m t^umaya ah^ pasava Gau- 
 mata hya M<3;gush adina K<3:(m)bujiy^m uta Pars^m 
 uta Mad^m uta aniya d<3:hyav<^ h<3;uv ay<3:sta uvaip<7shi- 
 yam akut<3; h^uv khshay^thiy^ ahava. 13. Thatiy 
 Dar^y<3;v^(h)ush khshay^thiy^s: n^iy aha martiya na'iy 
 Varsa naiy Mad^ n^iy amakh<3;m t<3:umaya ^k^^shciy hy<3; 
 avam G<2umat^m ty<2m Magum khsh<2tr<2m dit^^m 
 *c^khriya kar<2shim h^ca darshama at^rs^ kar^m v^siy 
 avaj^niya hya paranam B^rdiy<3;m adana av<a;hy<^radiy 
 kar^m avaj^niya '^maty^mam khshnasatiy ty^; ad^m 
 n^iy B<3:rdiy^ amiy hy^ Kur<7ush putr^ k^shciy n^iy 
 ad^rshn^ush cishciy th^st^n^iy p^riy G^umat^m ty^m 
 M^gum yata adam avasam pasava adam Aur^m^zdam 
 p<3;tiyav<^h^iy Aur^m^zdam^^iy up^stam ahava Bag<3:- 
 yad^ish mahya X r^uc^bish th^k^ta ah^ av^tha ad<a:m 
 h^da k<3!m^n^ibish martiy^ibish av^m G^umat^m tyam. 
 M^gum avaj^n^m uta ty<2ish<3:iy iraiama martiya 
 anushiya ah<a:(n)ta Sik^y^uv^tish ^nama* dida Nisay^ 
 nama d^hyaush Mad^iy av^d<3:shim avaj^n^m ^khsh^- 
 tr^mshim ad^m adin^m v^shna Aur^m^zdah^ ad^m 
 
 *For forms nam<7 and nama cf. the Grammar; but see Bar- 
 tholomae, Arische Forsch. I, 58; also Thumb, Zeitsch. fiir vergl. 
 Sprachforsch. (1891) 
 
 1 rrtucrtbish, 23. * adurujiy^/, 45. * adina, 43. * k^shciy, 31 . 
 •cflkhriya, 47. « maty^rmam, 101, A. ^ nama, 24; 61, A, Note 2. 
 * khshatrarashim ad^/m zdxnam, 64. 
 
57 
 
 khshay<i:thiy^ ahavam Aur^m^izda khsh<3:tr<7m m^^na 
 irsihara. 14. Thatiy Darrt:y<^v^(h)ush khshay<7thiy^ 
 khsh^tr<3;m ty^ ^h^ca amakh^m t^umaya parahartam 
 aha dva adam patipadam akunavam ad^^mshim 
 *gathva^ avastay^m y^tha paruvamciy av^tha ad^m 
 akun^v^m ayadana. tya Gaumata hya M<3:gush,viy^k^ 
 adam niyatrarayam kar^^hya abac^rish g^ithamca 
 maniy^mca 3v(i)thibishca tyadish G<3:umat^ hya M^gush 
 adina ad^m kar^m gathva avastay<^m Pars^mca Ma- 
 d^mca uta aniya d^hyav^ y^tha p<3:ruv<2mciy av^tha 
 ad^m tya parabartam patiyaharam v^shna Aura- 
 m<2zdah<7 ima adam akun^v^m ad^m h^m(3:t(7khsh^iy 
 yata v(i)th<3:m tyam amakh^m gathva avastay^^m 
 y<2tha p^ruv^mciy av^^tha ad^tm hamatakhshaiy 
 v^shna AuramayAaha y^tha G^umat<^ hya M^gush 
 v(i)th^m tyam amakh^m na'iy parabara. 15. Thatiy 
 Dar<3:y^v<^(h)ush khshay<^thiy<7 ima tya adam akuna- 
 vam pasava y^tha khshay^thiy^ ahavam. 16. Thatiy 
 T> ar ay av a (h)ush khshay<7:thiy<3: y^tha ad^m G^umat^m 
 tyrt:m M^gum avajanam pasava I martiya Atrina 
 nama \Jpadara(n)mahya putr^ h^uv udrt:prtt^ta 
 (H)uvaiaiy kar^hya av^tha athaha adam (R)uva]aiy 
 khshay^thiy^ amiy pasava (H)uv<7Jiya h^^mitriya ab^- 
 va(n) ably avam Atrin^m ashiy<2v^(n) h^uv khshay^- 
 thiy^ ab^v^ (H)uvaiaiy uta I martiya Babiruviy^ 
 N^dit^bir^ nama Aina - - hya putr^ h^uv ud^p^t^ta 
 Babir^uv kar^m av<ztha adurujiy^ ad^^m N<^buk(u)dr^- 
 cava amiy hya N^bunit^hya putr^z p^sav^ kar^ hy^ 
 Babiruviya haruva abiy avam N<3:dit«bir^m ashiy^v^x 
 Babirush h^mitriy^ ab<3;v^ khsh<^tr^m tya Babir^uv 
 hauv ag^rbay<a:ta. 17. Thatiy Dar<^y<?V(^(h)ush 
 
 khshay<^thiy<3; pf^-sav^^ adrt;m (kar^m) '^fraish^y^^m 
 
 *It is possible to regard this form as a locative (gathava) with post- 
 positive a (cf. note on {H)ufratauva I, 19; but the instrumental seems 
 preferable). 
 
 1 h<7ca amakh^m taumaya, 76. ^ gathva, 73. ' v(i)thibishca, 70, a. 
 '* fraish^yrtm (H)uvajam, 66. 
 
58 
 
 (H.)uva]am hauv Atrin^ hasta anayata, abiy mam 
 ad<^mshim a.va.]anam. 18. Thatiy Dar^y<3;v^(h)ush 
 khshay^zthiy<a; pas3.va a.dam Babirum ashiy^v^m abiy 
 av^m N^ditrtbir^m hy^ ^^ahuk(u)dracara ag^ub^ta 
 kara hya It^aditahirahya. Tigram adar^^y^ aisht^ta uta 
 abish naviya ah^ pasa,va ad^m kar^m-m^kauva ava- 
 "kanam aniy^m d^sh^barim akun^v^m a,niyahya. ashm 
 . . . ^n^y^m Auramazda.maiy up^stam shara v<^shna 
 Auramazdsha Tigram viy^t^^r^yam^ av<^da kar<3:m 
 ty^m N^dit^bir^^hya ad^^m a.]anam vasiy Atriyadiy^- 
 hy^ mahya 'XXVII r^uc^bish thakatd. aha av^tha 
 hamaranam akuma. 19. Thatiy Da.rayava(h.)ush 
 khshay^thiy^ p^^sav^ ad^m Babirum ashiy^v^m athiy 
 
 Babirum y<2tha ay<2m Zazan^ nam^ v^rd^- 
 
 n^m ^anuv (H)ufrat^uva* av^da h^uv N^xdit^^bir^ hy^ 
 Nrtbuk(u)dr^c^r^ ag<^ub«ta aisha ^h^da kara ^p^tish 
 mam h^m^r^n^m cartana'iy pasava h^m^^r^n^m akuma 
 Aur^m^zdam^iy up^stam ahara v^shna Aur^m^zdah<2 
 kar<7;m ty^m N^dit^bir^^hya ad^m aj^^n^m v^siy aniy^ 
 apiya - h - - a . . apishim parahara Anam^k^hy^ 
 mahya *II r^uc^bish th^k<3;ta ah^ av^tha h^m^r^n^m 
 akuma. 
 
 *(H)ufrrttmva: The a which occurs at the end of this locative 
 termination is doubtless the prefix a of ths Sanskrit. For a full dis- 
 cussion of this postpositive a; cf. Bazzenbergers Beitrage, XIII; also 
 for the same postpositive a in Avestan, cf Jackson Am, Or. Society 
 Proceedings (1889) and Kuhns Zeitschrift. XXXI. Cf. Grammar, 
 
 IC. F. 
 
 * Nrtbuk(u)dr^c«rez ag<zub«ta, Gl, B. ^XXVII r^uc^bish, 72. 
 » anuv (Hjufratrruva, 84. * h<7da kara, 70. "^ p^rtish mam -c<^tan<7iy, 
 54. N.; 60, B; 94. « II raucabish. 60, C. 
 
59 
 
 II. 
 
 1. Thatiy Dar^y^v<^(h)ush hkshay<?thiy^ pasa.va 
 T<^aditahira hada. k<2m<^n<^ibish asbaribish abiy Babirum 
 Rshiyava pasa.va a.dam Babirum ashiy^v^m v^shna 
 Aur^m^^zdah^ uta Babirum ag<3;rbay^m uta av^m 
 NrtJdit^bir^m ag^rbay<3:m pas3.va a.vam N<^dit<7bir^m 
 a.dam Babimuv avaj^n<7m. 2. Thatiy Dar<3;yrtv<7(h)ush 
 khshay^thiy(3: yata ad^m Babir<2uv sham ima d^^hyav^ 
 tya h^cam^ h^^mitriya ab^v«(n) Pars^ (ll)\ivaja Mad^ 
 Athura Arming Farthava M^rgush Th^^t^gush S^k^. 
 3. Thatiy Dar^y<3;v<3:(h)ush khshay<7thiy^ I m^rtiy^ 
 Martiya na.ma Cicikhraish putr<3; 'Kug<^n«ka nam<^ 
 v^rdrtn^m Pars^iy av^da adamy^ h^uv udapatata. 
 (H)uva]a\y kar^hya av^tha ath<2h^ ad<^m Im(^nish 
 amiy (V[)uvd]aiy khshay^thiy^. 4. Thatiy Da.raya- 
 \7z(h)ush khshay^thiy^ adrtk^iy ad<3:m ashn^^iy ah^m 
 
 abiy (H)uvrtj^nTi p^sav^^ h<^cam<2 (H)uv«jiya 
 
 av^^m Martiycim agrtrbayrt(n) hy^sham m<^thisht<^ aha 
 utashim avaj<7n«(n). 5. Thatiy D a.r ay av a (h)ush. 
 khshayrtthiyrt I m^rtiy^^ Fr^v^^rtish nam^o: Mad^ h^uv 
 ud^^p^t^ta Mard^iy kar^^hya av^xtha atht^h^ ad^m 
 Khshrtthrit^ amiy (H)uvrtkhshrt:t(7mhya t<^umaya 
 pasa.va ka.ra Mada hya v(i)thap(^tiy ah^ hacama 
 hrt;mitriy<7 abava abiy av<^m Fr^v^rtim ashiy<^v^ h^xuv 
 khshayrtthiy<^ ab^v<^ Mad^iy. 6. Thatiy 'Davaya- 
 vrt(h)ush khshay<7:thiy^ kar« Pars^ uta Mad^a; hy<^ upa 
 mam ah^a; 'h<^uv k^m^n^^m ah^ p^sav^: adrt'm kamm 
 fraish(7y<^m Vid^rn^ nam^ Pars^ m^na b^(n)d«k^ 
 av^msham m^thisht^m akun^v^m avrt:thasham ath«- 
 h^m p^^r^ita av^m kar^m ty^m Mad<a:m j^ta hy^ mrt:na 
 n^iy g^ub^t^iy p^sav^a: h^uv Yidavna hada. kara ashi- 
 yawa y^tha Mad^^m p^rar^s^ Ma . . . nam<2 v^rd^n^m 
 Mad^iy av<^da hamaranam akun^^ush h^da Mad^^ibish 
 hy^ Mad<3;ishuva m^thisht<^ aha hauv ad<3:k<^iy kama- 
 n^mciy n^iy a.daraya Aur^m^zdam^iy up<2stam ahava 
 
 ^ Kug^q^ka m.va.a, 61 a, Note 2. ^ h^zuv ]s.amavL(im aha, 8G a. 
 
6o 
 
 v^shna Auramazdaha ksLva hya Vid^rn<2hya av^m 
 kar^m tyam h^mitriy^^m a.]a vasiy Ana.makahya 
 mahya VI r^uc^bish th<2k<3:ta aha ^ av<3:thasham hama- 
 ranam kartam pasa.va hauv kara hya mana, K^(m)- 
 pada nama d^hyaush Mad^iy av^da mam cita ama- 
 naya yata ad^m a.rasam Mad^m. 7. Thatiy Da.ra- 
 yava(K)ush. khshay^thiy^ pasava Dad^arshish nam^ 
 Arminiy<^ m<^na ha(n)daka av^m ad^im fraish^y^^m 
 Arminrt;m av^thash^^iy athrt;h(^m p^rrt:idiy kar<?; hya 
 h^mitriy^ m^na naiy gauhataiy av^m j^-diy p^sav^ 
 Dad^rshish ashiyava y^tha Armin^-m pararasa pasava 
 h^mitriya ''ha(n)gmata. p<^r<2ita p^^tish Dad^^rhim ha- 
 
 maranam cartanaiy nam<i; avahanam. Arm^- 
 
 niy^^iy av^^da h^^m^mn^m akunava(n) Aiir<i'm(^zdam(^iy 
 uprtjstam ahara v^shna Aur^m<7zdah<^ kam hya mana, 
 a.vam kar^m ty<3;m hrt-mitriy^im . . a]a vas'iy Thur<3:va- 
 havahya mahya VI r^uc^bish ihakata. aha av<^thasham 
 hamaranam k^rt^'^m. 8. Thatiy Dar^y(^vrt(h)ush 
 khshayrtthiy<7 p<?tiy duvitiy^-m h^^mitriya ha(\\)g\'nata 
 paraita p^tish Dad^rshim hamarauam Qartanaiy Tigr^ 
 nama dida Arm^niy<^iy av^da h^m^Tr^^in^^m ak\xnava{n) 
 Aur^^m^^zdam^^-iy up^stam ahara v<7shna Aumm^zdah^ 
 kar^ hy^ m<7na av^m kar^m ty^m h^imitriy^m a]a 
 was'iy Thur^vah^mhy^ mahya XVIII r^uc^bish th^- 
 k^ta ah^ av^thasham h^'m^r^n^m kaviava. 9. Tha- 
 tiy Dar^y^v^(h)ush khshay^thiy^ p<^tiy tritiy^m 
 h<2mitriya ha(n)gma\.a. p^^r^ita p^-tish Dad^rshim ha- 
 m^r^n^m cavtanaiy U . . . . am^; nama dida Arm^- 
 niy<?iyav^da hamaYanava akunrtv^(n) Aur^m^zdam^iy 
 uprt-stam ahara v^shna Aur^-m^zdah^ kar^ hy^ m^?na 
 av^m kar^m ty^m h^mitriy^m a]a vasxy Thaig^rc^-ish 
 mahya IX r^ucrt;bish thakaia. aha av<'7thasham h^m^- 
 rarxam k^rt^m p^sav^ Dad^rshish cita mam aman^y^ 
 . a. . . yata ad^-m arasavn Mad^m. 10. Thatiy Dar<^7- 
 y^v^(h)ush khshay<'?thiy^ p^rsav^ V^umis^ nanirt! 
 
 * avrtthasham, GO, c. * h//(n)gm^ta, 80, c. 
 
6i 
 
 Pars^ mana. ha(n)da]<a av^m a.dam fraish^^iy^m Armi- 
 n^m av^thashrtiy ath^^h^m paraidiy kara hya ham'i- 
 triya mana. naiy gauhataiy av^m j^diy p^sav^a: 
 V^umis^ Sishiyava yatha, Armin^m pararasa pasa.va 
 h^mitriya ha(n)gmata, paraita p<?tish Vrt;umis<3:m 
 
 hamaranam cartanaiy - - I nama d^hyausk Athu- 
 
 raya av^da hamaranara akun^v^(n) Aur^m^zdajn^iy 
 up^stam ahara v^shna Auramazdaha kara hya mcma. 
 a,vam kar-^m tyam h<^mitriy^m a]a vasly Anam^k^hy^ 
 mahya XV muc^bish th<^k<^ta aha av^thasham hama- 
 ranam kartam. 11. ThatiyDar<2:y<2v^(h)ushkhshay<a:- 
 thiya pat'iy duvltiyam h^mitriya ha(n)gmata, p^r^ita 
 p^tish V<?umis^m hamaranam. cartanaiy Autiyar^ 
 nama d^hyaush Armin^iy av^da hamaranam akun^- 
 v^(n) Aur^m<?zdam(^iy up^stam ahara v<3;shna Aur^- 
 m<3:zdah<2 kar^ hya m^na a.wam karam tyam h^mi- 
 tiiyam aja vasiy Thuravaharahya mahya - iyamanam 
 patiy av<^thasham hamaranam kartam pasava Vau- 
 misa cita mam amanaya Armin^iy yata ad^m ar^s^^m 
 Mad<^m. 12. Thatiy D ar ay av a (h)ush khshay^thiy<3: 
 p^sav^ ad<^m nijay^m haca, Babir^ush ashiy^v<a;m 
 Mad<a;m y<3:tha Mad«m para.rasam Kud(u)rush na,ma 
 vardanam Mad^^iy av^da h^uv Fr^v^rtish hya Mad^iy 
 khshay<7thiy^ agauhata. aish^ h^da kara p^tish mam 
 hamaranam cartanaiy p^sav^ h^m^r^n^m akuma 
 Aur^m^zdam^?iy up^stam ahara v<?shna Aur^m^zdah^ 
 kar^m ty^m Fr<2v^rt(^ish ad<2:m a.]anam. vasiy Aduk^- 
 n<3:ish mahya XXVI r<^uc<3:bish th^k^ta ah<3: av^tha 
 hamaranam akuma. 13. Thatiy D a.r ay av a (h)ush 
 khshay<2thiy^ p^sav*^ h^uv Fr^v<3;rtish h<2:da \:ama- 
 n^ibish asbaribish amuth<3: Raga, nama d.'zhyaush 
 Mad^iy a^vada. ashiy^v<a; pasa.va adam kar^m fraish^- 
 yam ^tyaipatiy Fr<3;v^rtish "" agarhayata. anayata. abiy 
 mam ad^msh^iy uta nah<3;m uta g^^usha uta izavam 
 hajanam utash^iy ma a,va]am duv^r^yam<a:iy 
 
 1 tyrtip^tiy, 88, b. ^ ago rha.yata. anayata, 89, b. 
 
62 
 
 hasta adariy h^ruv^shim kara a.valna passiva ad^m 
 H^(n)gm«tan^iy uzamayapatiy akun<^v<3;m uta mar- 
 tiya tyaishaiy iratama. anushiya ahrt;(n)ta av^iy 
 ¥la(n)gmata.naiy a(n)t<?r didam frah«(n)j<^m. 14. 
 Thatiy Dar^y«v<^(h)ush khshayrtthiy^ I martiya 
 Citra(n)t^khm^ na.ma Asagartiya h^uvm<3:iy hami- 
 tr'xya abava kar^^hya av^tha a.thaha ad<2m khshay^- 
 thiya amiy As^g^^rt^iy (H)uvakh.shatarahya. t^umaya 
 pasa.va ad^m kar^m Pars^m uta Mad^^rn fraish<3:y^m 
 T^khm^spad^ nam^ M3.da mana.ha(n)daka av^^msham 
 m<7thisht^m akunavam av^aithasham Sithaham. paraitdi 
 kar<7m tyavs\ h<7mitriy^m hya m^na na'iy gauhditaiy 
 av^m j^ta p^sav^ T^khm<?spad^ h^da kara ashiy^v^ 
 hamaranam akun<2ush h^da Citr<3;(n)t^khma Aur^m<^z- 
 dam^iiy up<?stam dhava v^shna Auramazdaha ka.ra hya 
 mana. a.vam kanzm tyam hamitriyam a.]a uta Citr<3:(n)- 
 t<^khmrt:m agarha.ya ax\.aya abiy mam p^sav^sh^iy 
 adrt;m uta nah<3;m uta g^usha fraj^n^m utashrt'iy - - 
 shm^ avrtj<2m duv<2r<^yam<a:iy b^st^ adariy h^ruv^shim 
 kar^ a.va\xia p^sav^shim Arbiraya uz<3:m^yap<a:tiy aku- 
 r\avavci. 15. Thatiy Dar^y^v<a:(h)ush khshay^thiy<3: 
 im^ ty^ m^na k^^rt^m Mad^iy. 16. Thatiy 'Daxaya- 
 
 v<^(h)ush khshay<2thiy<3: P«rth<3:v^ uta Narka.na 
 
 va Fr^v^rt<3!ish ag<3:ub<3:ta V(i)shtaspa 
 
 m^na pita h kar^ a.vahar atara pasava 
 
 V(i)shtasp^ ab anushiya ay^ Visp<3:uz -- 
 
 tish nam^ v^rd^n^m da h^m^r^^n^m akun^v^ 
 
 avtfthasham h^m^r^nam k^rt^m. 
 
63 
 
 III. 
 
 1. Thatly Dar^y<^v<^(h)ush khshay^thiy<3! p^sav^ 
 3.dam kar^m Pars^m fraish«y<^m abiy V(i)shtasp^m haca. 
 R<7gaya y<^tha hauv ka.ra pararasa abiy V(i)shtasp^m 
 p«sav<3;V(i)shtasp(3; ay<3:sta av^m kar^m ashiy^v^ Vati- 
 ^rabami n3.ma vardanam Tarthavaiy a,vada. hamavanam 
 akun^ush h^da h^a-mitriymbish Auramazda.maiy upas- 
 tam ahara vashna Auramazdaha V(i)shtasprt; avam 
 kar^m tyam h^mitriy<3:m aja vasiy Garmapadahya 
 mahya *I rauca th^krt:ta ah^ av^thasham hamaranam 
 kartam. 2. Thatiy Dar<7y^v^(h)ush khshay^thiy^ 
 yasava d<3:hyaush mana ahava ima tya mana kartam 
 Varthavaly. 3. Thatiy Dar^y<^V(^(h)ush khshay<3:thiydf 
 M<7rgush nama d^hyaush h<^uvm^iy h^shitiy^ ahava 
 'I martiya Frad^ nama Mavgava avam m^thisht^m 
 akun^v<2(n)ta p^sav^ ad<3:m 3fraish^y<3;m Dad^rshish 
 nama Farsa mana b^(n)d^k^ Bakhtriya khsh^xtr^pava 
 abiy avam avathashaiy ath<3:h<3:m p^r^idiy av^m kamm 
 j<3:diy hy^ mana naiy gauhataiy pasava Dad^rshish 
 hrt:da kara ashiy^v^ hamaranam akun^ush h^da Mar- 
 g<7y<^ibish Auramazdamaly up^^stam ahara v^shna 
 Aur^m^zdah^ kar^ hya m^na avam karrttm . . tyam 
 h^^rnitriy^m a]a v^siy Atriyadiy<^hy^ mahya XXIII 
 r<3:uc<a;bish th^k^ta ah^ av^^thasham hamaranam kar- 
 tam. 4. Thatiy Dar^y^v^(h)ush khshay^iJthiy^ p^sa- 
 v^ d<2:hyaush m^na ahava ima tya mana kartam 
 Bakhtriya. 5. Thatiy D ar ay av a (h)ush khshay^thiy^ 
 I martiya Vahyazdata nama Tar^va nama vardanam 
 Yutiya nama d^hyaush Pars^iy av^da adar^y^ hauv 
 ■duvitiy^m ud<3:p<3:t^ta Pars^iy kar^hya av^tha athaha 
 ad^m B<a:rdiy^ amiy hy^ Kur<2ush putr^ pasava kara 
 Tarsa hya v(i)thaprttiy h^ca yadaya iratarta hauv 
 l[\acama h^mitriy^ ab^v^ abiy av^m V^hy^zdat^m 
 ashiy^v^ h^uv khshay^thiy^ ab^v^ Pars^iy. 6. Tha- 
 
 1 1 vawca, 46, a. ^ j martiya Frada - avam, 61, A. ■ fraishayam 
 Dadarshish, 61, a, Note 1. 
 
64 
 
 tiy D3irayava(h)ush. khshay<3;thiy^ pas3.va adam kar<?m 
 Pars<^m uta Mad^m iraishayam hya upa mam aha 
 Artavardiya nama Pars<3; mana hai^n^daka av^msham 
 m^thisht^m akun^v<7m hya aalya kara Varsa ^pasa 
 mana ashiy^v^ Mad<7m pasava Artavardiya hada kara 
 ashiyava Pars<3:m y^tha Pars<3;m pararasa R^kha nam^ 
 vardanam Pars^iy av<a:da h^uv Yahyazdata hya Bar- 
 d'lya agauhata aish^ h<3:da kara p<7tish Artavardiyam 
 h^^m^rrt-n^^m cartanaiy p^sav^x h^m^r^in^m akun^vrt(n) 
 Aur^m^zdam^iy up^stam ahara v^shna Aur<7m^zdah<3! 
 kar^i: hya m«na av^m kar^m ty^m V ahyazdatahya 
 a]a Yas\y Thur^^vah^^r^hy^ mahya XII raucah'ish tha- 
 kata aha av^thasham hamaranam k^^rt^m. 7. Thatiy 
 D ar ay av a (h)ush khshay<2thiy<3: p^sav^ hauv Yahyaz- 
 data hada k^^m^ri^ibish as^^baribish amuth^ ashiy^v^ 
 Prt;ishiyauvadam haca avadasha kar^^m ay^^sta hyap^- 
 r^m aish^ p^^itish Art<3:v^rdiy<^m h^m^r^n^m cartanaiy 
 Yaraga nam^ kauia av^da h^^m^^r^n^m akun^v«(n) 
 Aur^^m^zdam^iy up^stam ahara v^shna Aur^m(7zdah<i: 
 kar« hya m^na av^m kar<^m ty^m V^hy^zdat^hy^ 
 aja vasiy Garmapadahya mahya VI r^uc<7:bish th^k^ita 
 aha av<3:thasham hamaranam kartam uta av^^m Ya- 
 hy^zdat^m ag^rbay^(n) uta m^rtiya ty^ish^iy fr^t^ma 
 anushiya ah^(n)t« ag^rbay^(n). 8. Thatiy Daraya- 
 v<2(h)ush khshay^thiy^ p^sav^ ad^m av^m V^hy<2z- 
 dat^m uta m^rtiya tyc-zish^iy fr^t^ma anushiya 
 ah^(n)t^ Uvadrtid^y^ nam« v^rd^n^OTn Pars^iy awa- 
 d^shish uz^mrtiyap^tiy akun<2v^m. 9. Thatiy Dara- 
 y^v^(h)ush khshay<^thiy^ h^uv V^hy^zdat^ hy^ B^r- 
 diy^ agrtubrt:ta h^uv kar^im fraish^y<a; H^r^uv^tim 
 Vivan« nam^ Pars<2; m^na brt(n)d<^k^ H<^rrt:uv«tiya 
 khsh^tr^pava abiy av^m utasham I m^rtiy^m ma- 
 thishtrtm akun^ush av^thasham ath^h^: p^r^ita Viva- 
 rium j^ta uta av^m kar^m hy^ Dar^y^v^hush 
 khshay^thiy^hya g^ub^t^iy p^sav^ h^uv kara ashiya- 
 
 1 pasa mana, 80, b. 
 
6s 
 
 ya ty^m V^hy^zdat^ fraish^y^ abiy Vivan^m hama- 
 ranam cartanaiy Kapish^kanish nama dida av^da 
 hamaranam akun<2v^(n) Auramazdamaly up^stam 
 abara v^shna Auramazdaha ksiva hya mana, a.vam 
 karam tyam h^mitriy^m a.]a vasiy Anam^k^hy^ ma- 
 hya XIII r^uc<2bish th^k^ta aha ^av^thasham hama- 
 ranam kartam. 10. Thatiy Dar^y^v<3:(h)ush khshay^- 
 thiya p^tiy hyaparam h^mitriya ha(n)gmata, paraita. 
 p^tish Vivan<3:m hamaranam cartanaiy Ga(n)dutava 
 nama d<3:hyaush av^^da hamaranam akun^v^(n) Aur^- 
 m^zdam^iy up<3;stam ahara v<3:shna Aur<3:m^zdah^ kar<3: 
 hya mana, a.vam kar<3;m tyam hamitriyam a]a wasiy 
 Yiyakhnahya mahya VII rawcahish th^k^ta aha a,wa- 
 thasham hamaranam kartam. 11. Thatiy Dar^y^- 
 v^(h)ush khshay<2thiy^ p<3:sav^ h^uv martiya hya 
 av^^hya kar^hya m^thisht^ aha tyam YahyazdaXa 
 iraishaya abiy Vivan<3:m h^uv m^thisht<3: h<3:da kama- 
 n^ibish as<3;baribish ashiy<2v<3: Arshada nama dida 
 }laraMvat\ya. a.vapara. atiyaish<3; p^sav^ Vivan^ h<2:da 
 kara *nip^diy ty<2iy ashiy<^v^ av^dashim a.garha.ya 
 uta m^rtiya ty^ish^iy iratama, anushiya ah^(n)ta 
 avaj^. 12. Thatiy Dar^y<3;v^(h)ush khshay^thi}^^ 
 pasa.va d^hyaush m^na ab^v^ im<3: ty^ m^na k^rt^-m 
 H^r^uv^tiya. 13. Thatiy Dar^y^v^(h)ush khshay<3:- 
 thiy^ yata ad^m Pars^iy uta Mad^iy ah^m p^tiy 
 duvitiy^m Babiruviya h<3:mitriya ab^v^(n) h^cam<a: I 
 m<a:rtiy^ Ar<a:kh^ nam<3; Arminiy^ H^n(?)dit^hy^ putr<35 
 hauv ud<3:p<2t(^ta Babir<3;uv Duban(?)^ nama d<2:hyaush 
 h^ca a,vadasha hauv ud^p<3:t^ta av<3:tha adurujiy^ ad^m 
 "^ahukudracara amiy hy^ N(3:bunit<3;hya putr^ p^sav^ 
 kara Babiruyiy^ haca.ma h^mitriy<3: abava abiy av^m 
 Amkh^m ashiy^v^ Babirum hauv ag(^rbay<3;ta h^uv 
 khshay^thiy<3! ab^v^ Babir<3:uv. 14. Thatiy Daraya- 
 v<3;(h)ush khshay^thiy^ pasa.va adam kar<3:m fraish<3:- 
 y<3;m Babirum Vi(n)d^fra nam^ Mad<2 m^na b^(n)d<2k^ 
 
 ^ avflthasham hamaranam kartam, 80, a. * nipadiy, 84, a. 
 
66 
 
 avam m^thisht^m akun^v^m av<3!thasham dLthaham pa- 
 raita. a.vam karam tyam Babir<3:uv ]ata, hya mam, naiy 
 gauhataiy p^sav<3; Vi(n)d<3:fra hada. kara ashiyava abiy 
 Babirum Aur^mzdam^iy up^stam ahara v^shna Aur^- 
 
 mazdaha Vi(n)d^fra Babirum a.garha,ya mahya 
 
 II r^uc^bish th^k^ta aha avatha ava 
 
 ap^tiy a,sanyata.. 
 
67 
 
 IV. 
 
 1. Thatiy Da.rayava(h)ush. khsha-yathiya Ima tya 
 man3. kartam Babir<3;uv. 2. Thatiy D ar ay av a (h.)ush. 
 khshay^thiy^ ima tya adam akun^v<a:m v^shna Aur^- 
 mazdaha aha hamahyaya tharda pasava y^tha khsha- 
 y^thiya h^mitriya ahava(n) adam XIX hamarana 
 akun^v<;7m v<2shna Aur^m^zdah<3: 'ad^msham ajanam 
 uta IX khshay^thiya agarhayam I G<2:umat<3; nama 
 Magush. aha hauv adurujiy^ av^tha athaha adam Bar- 
 d\ya amiy hya Kur^^ush putr<3: haww Yaxsam. hami- 
 txiyam akun^ush 1 K\.xma nam« (H)uv<2J<2iy h^uv 
 adurujiy^ avatha athaha adam khshay^thiy<aj amiy 
 (H)uv^j<3;iy h^uv (H)uvaiam h^mitriy<a:m akun<7ush 
 mana I N^dit^bir<3; nama Babiruviy<2 h^uv adurujiy^ 
 avatha ath^h^a; ad^m Nabukudr^c^r^ amiy hya N^bu- 
 nitrthy^ putr^ h^uv Babirum h^mitriy^m akun^ush I 
 M^rtiy^ nam<3; Parses; h^uv adurujiy^ avatha ath^h^ 
 ad^m Im<3:nish amiy (H)uv^j«iy khshay^thiy^ h^uv 
 (H)uv^j^m htxmitriy^m akun^ush I Fr^v^rtish nam^ 
 Mad^ h^uv adurujiy^ avatha ath^h^ ad^m Khsh^- 
 thrit<2: amiy (il)uvakhshatarahya t<2umaya h<3:uv Ma- 
 d<a;m h^mitriy^m akun^ush I Citrrt(n)t<^khm<a: nam^ 
 Asagartiya hauv adurujiy^ avatha athaha adam. 
 khshay<2:thiy^ amiy Asagartaiy (H)uv^khsh^t<3:r^hy^ 
 t^umaya h^uv Asagartam h^mitriy^m akun^ush 
 I Frad<a! nam<3; Marg^v^ h^uv adurujiy^ av<3:tha athaha 
 adam khshay^thiy^ amiy M^rg^uv h^uv M^rgum 
 h^mitriy^m akun^ush I V^hy^zdat^ nam^a; Pars^ hauv 
 adurujiy<3: av<3:tha athaha adam Bardiya amiy Kur^ush 
 putra hauv Pars<2:m h^mitriy^m akun^ush I Ar^kh^a; 
 nam^ Arminiy<a: h^uv adurujiy^ avatha athaha adam 
 'Nahukudracara amiy hya Nabunit^hy^a: putr<3; hauv 
 Babirum h^mitriy^m akun<a;ush. 3. Thatiy Daraya- 
 va(h)ush khshay<2thiy^ im^iy IX khshay^thiy^ ad«m 
 ag<2;rbay«m a(n)t«r ima hamarana. 4. Thatiy Data- 
 
 1 adflmsham ajanam, 83, b. 
 
68 
 
 yava(h)ush. khshay^thiy^ dahya.va ima tya h^mitriya 
 ab^v^(n) draugadish akun^^ush ^tya im^iykar^m adu- 
 rujiy<3:sh^(n) pasRva dish Aur<3;m<a:zda mana, dastaya 
 akun<3;ush yaths. 'mam kam^ av^tha di - - . 5. Tha- 
 tiy Dar^y<3:v^(h)ush khshay^thiy^ tuv^m ka khshay<3:- 
 thiya hya a.param ahy ^haca. dr^uga d^rsh<3:m patipa- 
 y^uva m^rtiy^ hya drau]ana ah^^tiy av^m (h)ufr<^st^m 
 p^rsa y^diy avatha, 4m<^niyahy d(a:hyaushm<^iy duruva 
 ah^tiy. 6. Thatiy Dar ay av a (h.)ush'khsh.a.yathiy a ima 
 tya adam akun^v^m v^shna Aur^m<2!zdah^ ^hama- 
 hyaya tharda akun<2v^m tuvam ka hya aparam imam 
 dipim ^p^tip^rsahy tya m^na k^rt^^m varnavatam 
 'thuvam maty<3J durujiyahy. 7. Thatiy Darayava- 
 (h)ush khshay^thiy^ AuramavAa taiyiya y<3:tha im<a: 
 hashiyam naiy durukht<3:m ad^m akunrt;v<2m hama- 
 hyaya tharda. 8. Thatiy D ar ay av a (h)ush khshay^- 
 thiy^ v^shna Aur<2m^zdah« -- am^iy aniy^shciy v^siy 
 astiy kartam ava ahyaya dipiya n^iy nipisht^m ava- 
 hy^radiy naiy nipisht<2m maty^ hya aparam imam 
 dipim p^tip<3:rsatiy av^hya paruv tha .... tya mana 
 kartam n<3:ishim varnavatiy durukht<3:m m^niyatiy. 
 9. Thatiy Dar«y^v^(h)ush khshay^thiy^^; ty<3:iy p^ruva 
 khshay<2thiya - a ah<2(n) av^isham n<3:iy astiy k^rt<a;m 
 y<3:tha m<3:na v^shna Aur<3:m<3:zdah<2 h^m^^hyaya duvar- 
 tam. 10. Thatiy Dar^y^v^(h)ush khshay^thiy^ 
 
 nur^m thuvam varnavatam tya mana k^rt<a:m ava- 
 
 tha av^hy^radiy ma apagaudaya yadiy imam 
 
 h<2(n)dugam n<3:iy ap^g^ud^yahy kar^hya thahy Aura- 
 mazda thuvam d^ushta ^biya utat^iy t^uma v^siy biya 
 uta dra(n)gam jiva. 11. Thatiy Dar^y«v^(h)ush 
 khshay^thiy^ y<3;diy imam h^(n)dugam ap<3:g^ud^yahy 
 n^iy thahy kar^hya Aur^m^zdat^y j^ta biya utat^iy 
 t^uma ma biya. 12. Thatiy Dar^y^v^(h)ush khsha- 
 y«thiy<3J im^ tya ad^m akun^v^m h^m^hyaya th^rd^ 
 
 1 tya imaiy karam adurujiyfl-shafn), 97. ' mam kam^z, 66. " hacB. 
 drfluga, 77. * maniyahy, 91, a. «* h</m«hyaya th<7rdrt!, 80, c. •pati- 
 parsahy, 91. 'thuvam matya durujiyahy, 89, a. ® biya, 51, N. 
 
TORARy 
 
 69 
 
 v<2shna Auramazdaha dkunavam Aur<7m<3:zdam^iy 
 up(^stam ahara uta aniya b^gah^ ty^iy h«(n)tiy. 13. 
 Thatiy Dar^y^v^(h)ush khshay<2thiy^ av<^hy^radiy 
 Aur^m^zda up<2stam abara uta aniya b^gah<3! ty^iy 
 h^(n)tiy y^^tha naiy arika aham naiy drau]ana aham 
 
 naiy zurakara a}\am im^iy t^uma up^riy 
 
 ab<a:shtam up^riy mam naiy sh^k^urim huv^- 
 
 tavci zura akun<3:vrt:m ty^m<^iy hy^ h^m^t^khsh^ta ma- 
 na vithiya av<^m (h)ub<2rt^m ab^r^m hy^ iyani . . avam 
 (h)ufr^st<^m ap^rs^m. 14. Thatiy Dar^y^v^(h)ush 
 khshay<2thiy^ 'tuv^m ka khshay^thiy^ hy^ ap^r^m 
 
 ahy m^rtiy^ hy<3: drau)ana ah^tiy hy<3;va - tar aha- 
 
 tiy av<^iy ma d^ushta av^iy ahiteshtadiy p^rsa. 15. 
 Thatiy D ar ay av a (h.)ush. khshay^thiy<3: tuv^m ka hy<^ 
 aparam imam dipim v<^inahy tyam ad^m niy^pish^m 
 im<^iva p^tik<3:ra maty^ 'vis^nahy yava jiv^^hy ava(?) 
 avrttha p^rik<2ra. 16. Thatiy Dar^y^v^(h)ush khsha- 
 y^thiy^ y^diy imam dipim v^inahy im<7iva p^tik<2ra 
 n^iydish vis^nahy utam^iy ^yava t^uma ah^^tiy pari- 
 k^rah^dish Aur^m^zda '♦thuvam d^ushta biya utat^iy 
 trtuma v^siy biya uta dra[n)gam jiva uta ty^ kun«- 
 
 vahy av^t^iy Aur^m^zda m m j<7:d^n^utuv. 17. 
 
 Thatiy Dar^y(^v«(h)ush khshay^thiy<3: y^-diy imam 
 dipim im^iva prt:tik<3:ra v^inahy vis^nah^idish utam<3:iy 
 yava t^uma ah^tiy n^iydish p^rik^^rahy Aur^a^m^zda- 
 t^iy ]ata biya. utat^iy t^uma ma biya uta tya kuna- 
 vahy av<^t^iy Aur^^m^zda nik^(n)tuv. 18. Thatiy 
 Dar«y^v<2(h)ush khshay^thiy^ im<a:iy m^rtiya ty^iy 
 ad^k^iy av^da ah^(n)ta yata ad^m G^umat^m ty^m 
 M^gum avaj<^n^m hy^ B<3:rdiy^ ag^ub^ta ad<7k<3:iy 
 im^iy m^rtiya h^m<3;t<3:khsh^(n)ta anushiya m^na 
 Vi(n)d^fr^na nam^ V^y^spar^hya putm Pars^ Utan^ 
 nam^ Thukhr^hya putr<3; Pars^: Gauharuva nama Mar- 
 duniy^hya putr^ Pars<3! Vid^rn^ nam« B^gabign<3!hya 
 
 1 tuvrtm ka, 62. 2 vig^nahy, 91, d. ^ yava t^iuma ah^tiy, 91, e. 
 * thuvam d^zushta biya, 65. 
 
70 
 
 putr^ Pars^ B^g^bukhsh^ nam« Daduhy^hya putr^ 
 F3.rsa Ardum^nish nam^ V^h<3:uk^hya putr^ Pars^. 
 19. Thatiy Dar^y^v«(h)ush khshay^thiy<3: tuv^m ka 
 khshay^thiy^ hya aparam ahy tyama vidam t^r- 
 tiyana — tya Dar^y^v^(h)ush - — ----_-___ 
 - - akun^v^m. 
 
71 
 
 1. Thatiy Dar^y^v^(h)ush khshay^thiy^ ima tya 
 
 ad^m akunavam ma . r thardam - - tha khsha- 
 
 yathiya vajanam d<3:hyaush h^uv haca.- 
 
 ma h^mitriya shava I martiya - imaima na.ma (H)uv^- 
 jiya a.vam m^thisht^m akun^v<3;(n) pasa.va a.dam kar^m 
 fraish^y^m (H)uva]am I martiya Gauharuva nama 
 Tdivsa mana. ha(^n)daka av<^msham m^thisht^m akun^a:- 
 v^m passiva hauv Gauharuva hada. kara ashiy^v^ 
 (H)uv^j^m hamaranam akun^ush h^da h^mitriy^ibish 
 
 pasa,va utash^iy marda uta .... a.garha,ya uta 
 
 aniy^ abiy mam d^hyaush ]anam a.va- 
 
 d^shim .... 2. Thatiy Dar<3:y<2v^(h)ush khshay^- 
 thiy^ a . . . uta d^h . . . Aur^m^zda . . aya . . . v^shna 
 Auramazdaha . . .thadish akun^v<3:m. 3. Thatiy Da- 
 Tayava(h)ush. khshay^thiy<3: hy^ aparam imam ya, . . . 
 
 . .hrttiy uta jiv^hya 4. Thatiy Dar^y<3;v^(h)ush 
 
 khshay^thiy^ ashiy^v^m abiy St^kam 
 
 Tigram b^r^ty<2 iy abiy d^r<^y^m av^zm .... 
 
 ... .a pisa viyatara aj^n^m aniy^m agar- 
 
 bay^^m abiy mam uta S<7ku(n)k^ nam^ 
 
 av<^m ag^rbay^m avada aniy<3;m m^thisht^m 
 
 am aha pasava da 5. Thatiy Dara- 
 
 y<^v<3:(h)ush khshay<^thiy<^ ma n^iy Aura- 
 
 mazda y<3:diy v<3:shna Aur^m^zdah<3: 
 
 akun<^v^m. 6. Thatiy Dar<^y<3;v^(h)ush khshay^thiy^ 
 
 Aur^m^zdam yadata uta jiva- 
 
 hya uta . . 
 
72 
 
 Smaller Behistan Inscriptions, 
 
 OVER THE PICTURE OF DARIUS. 
 
 Adam Dsirayava(h)ush. khshay<2thiy^ vazraka 
 khshay^thiy<3; khshay^thiyan^m khsha.yathiya Par- 
 saiy khshay^thiy<3: d<3;hyunam V(i)shtasp^hya putr^ 
 Arsham^hya napa H^kham^^nishiy^s; Thatiy Dar^ya- 
 va(h)ush. khshay^^thiy^ mana. pita V(i)shtasp^ V(i)sh- 
 tasp<3:hya pita Arsham^ Arsham<3;hya pita Ariyar^mn^ 
 Ariyar<a;mn^hya pita C^ishpish C^ishp(3:ish pita H<3;kha- 
 m^nish Thatiy Dar<3;y^v<3:(h)ush khshay<3:thiy<3; Sivahya^ 
 radiy vayam H<3;kham<3:nishiya th^hyam^hy haca, 
 p^ruviy^t<3: amata am^hy haca, paruviyata hya ama- 
 kh^m t^uma khshay^thiya aha(n) Thatiy Daraya- 
 v^(h)ush khshay^thiy^a; VIII mana. t^umaya ty^iy 
 p^ruv^m khshay^thiya ah<a:(n) ad^m navama IX duvi- 
 tat^rn^m vayam khshay^thiya am^hy 
 
 b. 
 
 UNDER THE PROSTRATE FORM. 
 
 lyam Gaumata hya M<3;gush adurujiy^ av<3^tha ath^a;- 
 ha adam B^rdiy^s; amiy hy^ Kur^ush putr^ ad^m 
 khshay^thiy^ amiy. 
 
 c. 
 
 OVER THE FIRST UPRIGHT FIGURE. 
 
 ly^m Atrin<2 adurujiy^ av^tha a.thaha a.dam khsha- 
 yathiya amiy (H)uv^j^iy. 
 
 d. 
 
 OVER THE SECOND FIGURE. 
 
 ly^m N^dit^bir^ adurujiy^ av^tha athaha ad^m 
 'Nahuk(u)dracara amiy hya N^bunit^hy^ putr^ add;m 
 khshayathiya amiy Babir^uv. 
 
73 
 
 e. 
 
 UPON THE LOWER PART OF THE ATTIRE OF THIRD FIGURE. 
 
 lyam Fr^v<3:rtish adurujiy^: av^tha a.thaha d.dam 
 Khsh<a;thrit<3; amiy (H)uvakhsha.yatarahya t^xumaya 
 ad^m khshay^thiy^ amiy Mad^iy. 
 
 f. 
 
 OVER THE FOURTH FIGURE. 
 
 lyam M^rtiy<3: adurujiy^a: av^tha a.th.aha a.dam Ima- 
 nish amiy (H)uv^j^iy khshay^thiy^. 
 
 OVER THE FIFTH FIGURE. 
 
 Iy<^m Citr^(n)t^khm<3: adurujiy^ av^tha athaha adam 
 khshay^thiy^ As^g^rt^iy (H)uv^khsh^t^r^hy^ tau- 
 maya. 
 
 h. 
 
 OVER THE SIXTH FIGURE. 
 
 lyam Vahyazdata adurujiy^ av^tha athaha a.dam 
 B<3:rdiy^ amiy hya Kur<3;ush putr^ ad<3:m khshay^thiy^a 
 amiy. 
 
 OVER THE SEVENTH FIGURE. 
 
 ly^m Arakha adurujiy^ av^tha athaha adam N^- 
 buk(u)dr^c^r<3; amiy hya N<3:bunit^hya putr^ ad^m 
 khshay^thiy^ amiy Babir^uv. 
 
 OVER THE EIGHTH FIGURE. 
 
 ly^m Frad^ adurujiy^a: sLvatha, aihaha adam khsha- 
 y^thiy^ amiy M^rg<a:uv. 
 
 k. 
 
 OVER THE NINTH FIGURE. 
 
 ly^m S<3!ku(n)k^ hya Saka. 
 
74 
 
 III. 
 
 The Inscription of Alvend. (O.) 
 
 "Baga vazraka Aur^m^zda hya imam bumim ada 
 hya divam asman<3:m ada hya martiyam ada hya shiya- 
 tim ada martiyahya, hya ^Da.rayava(h)um khshay^- 
 thiy<3:m aivam p^runam fr<3;matar^m Ad<3:m Daraya- 
 v<3:(h)ush khshay<3:thiy^ vazraka khshay^thiy<3; khsha- 
 y^thiyanam khshay^thiy^a: d<2;hyunam p^ruz<^nanam 
 khshayathiya ahyaya bumiya v<a;zr^kaya dur^iy apiy 
 Vishtasp^hya putr^ H<2kham<a:nishiy^. 
 
 ^ Dar<zyava(b)um kbshayatbiyam akunaush, 64, a. 
 
75 
 
 IV. 
 
 Inscriptions of Suez. (SZ.) 
 
 Dar^y^v^(h)ush khshay<3;thiy^ vazvaka khshay^- 
 thiy^ khshay<3:thiyanam khshay^thiy^ d^hyunam 
 Vishtasp^hya putm H^kham^nishiy^. 
 
 'Baga vazvaka A\iramazd3. hya avam asman<3:m ada 
 hya imam bumim ada hya martiyam ada hya shiyatim 
 ada m^rtiy^hya hya Dar^y<3;v^(h)um khshay^thiy<3:m 
 akun^ush hya Darayavahaush khshay^thiy^hya 
 khsh<3:tr<3:m irahara tya vazrakam tya .... Ad<3:m 
 Dar<a:y<3;v^(h)ush khshay^thiy^ vazvaka khshay<3:thiy<2: 
 khshay^thiyanam khshay^thiy^ d<3:hyunam pavuvza- 
 nanam khshay<3:thiy<3: ahyaya bumiya vazvakaya. du- 
 raiy apiy Vishtasp^hya putr^ H^kham^xnishiy^ Tha- 
 tiy Dar^y<3:v^(h)ush khshay^thiy<3; ad^^m Tavsa amiy 
 h<3:da Parsa Mudray^m ag^rbay^m a.dam niy^shtay<a;m 
 imam yuviyam ka(n)taviaiy haca. ^Fiva,va via.ma vauta 
 tya Mudray^iy d^n^uv^tiy abiy d^r^y^ tya haca. 
 Parsa aitiy pasdiva iyam yuviya (akaniy) av^(da) 
 
 y^tha ad^^m niy<3:shtay^m ut ay^ta haca, . . . ya 
 
 mam yuviyam abiy pa ta y<a:tha ma 
 
 * Piravtf namo rauta, 68. 
 
76 
 
 V. 
 
 Inscription of London. 
 Ad^m Par^yav^(h)ush khshay<3;thiy^. 
 
77 
 
 Inscriptions of Persepolis. 
 H. 
 
 ABOVE THE WALL SURROUNDING THE PALACE OP PERSEPOLIS. 
 
 Aur<2m<2zda vazxaVa hya maihishta b^^ganam h^uv 
 Dar^y^v<2(h)um khshay^thiy^m ad^da h^ush^iy 
 khsh<2;tr<3:m irahara v^shna Aur<3;m^zdaha DsLvaya- 
 v^(h)ush khshay<2thiy(2; Thatiy Dar<3;y^v^(h)ush khsha- 
 yathiya iyam d^xhyaush Pars<2 tyam mana. Aur^m^zda 
 irabara hya, naiha ([h]uv^spa) (h)um^rtiya v<2shna 
 Aur^m(^zdaha manaca, Darayavahaush. khshay<3;thiy^- 
 hya haca. aniy^na naiy tarsatiy Thatiy Daraya- 
 v^(h)ush khshay^thiy^ mana Aur^m^zda up^stam 
 haratuv hada vithibish hagaibish uta imam d<3:hyaum 
 Aur<3:m<2zda patuv h<^ca h<3:inaya haca. dushiyara haca. 
 dr<2uga aniy<a: imam d<3;hyaum ma. . aj^miya ma h^ina 
 ma dushiyar<3:m ma drauga a.ita adam yan - - m 
 j^diyamiy Aur^m^zdam h^da 'vithibish b^gmbish 
 ait^m<3!iy Aur<2m^zda d^datuv h^da vithibish b^g^ibish. 
 
 I. 
 
 ANOTHER INSCRIPTION ABOVE THE WALL. 
 
 Ad^m Dar^y<3:v^(h)ush khshay^thiy^ v^zr^k^ 
 khshay^thiy<2 khshay^thiyanam khshay<3:thiy<2 d<2hyu- 
 nam ty<3:isham p<3;runam Vishtasp<2hya putr^ H^kha- 
 m^nishiya Thatiy Dar^y^v^(h)ush khshay^thiy^ 
 v^shna Aur^m^zdaha ima d^hyav^ tya ad^m ad^r- 
 sh^iyh^da ana Parsa kara tya hacama at^rs<2(n) m^na 
 bajim a.hara(n) (H)uv^j^ Mad<3; Babirush Arahaya 
 Athura Mudraya Arming K<2t^p«tuk^ Sp^rd^a; Y^una 
 ty<a:iy (h)ushk<2hya uta tya'iy darayahya. uta dahyava 
 tya p^r^uvi^iy As^g^^rt^ Varthava ZaTa(n)ka Haraiva 
 Bakhtrish Sugd<2: (H)uvar^z<3;miy^ Th(3:t<3:gush Harau- 
 v<2tish Hi(n)dush G^(n)dar^ S^ka Maka Thatiy Dar^- 
 y<2;v^(h)ush khshay^thiy^ y^diy av<2tha m^niyahy 
 
 1 vithibish b^goibish, 86, a 
 
78 
 
 ^hacsi aniyana. ma tarsam im^m Pars<3;m kar^^m padiy 
 yadiy ka.ra Farsa pa.ta ah^'tiy hya duv^^isht^m shiya- 
 tish akhsh^ta h^uvciy Aura nir^satiy abiy imam 
 vitham. 
 
 B. 
 
 OVER THE PILLARS IN THE PALACE. 
 
 Dar^y^v^(h)ush khshay^thiy^ vazraka khshay^- 
 thiya khshay<3:thiyanam khshay<3:thiy<3! d<2;hyunam 
 Vishtap^hya putr^ . Hakham<a:nishiy^ hya im^m taca- 
 ram akun^ush. 
 
 1 haca aniyana ma tarsam, 11, a; 95, b. 
 
79 
 
 Inscriptions of Naqshi Rustam. (NR) 
 
 a. 
 
 Baga vazraka Aur^m^^zda hya imam bumim ada 
 hya a.vam asman«^m ada hya martiyam ada hya shiya- 
 tim- ada martiyahya, hya Dar^y^v<2(h)um khshay^- 
 thiy<3:m akun<2ush aiv^m p^ruvnam khshay<2:thiy<2m 
 aiv<3:m p^ruvnam fr^mat^r^m Ad^m Dar<3'y^v^(h)ush 
 khshay^thiy^ vazraka khshay^thiy^ khshay^thiyanam 
 khshay^thiy^ d<2hyunam visp^z^nanam khshay^thiy^ 
 ahyaya bumiya vazakaya, dur^iy apiy Vishtasp^^ihya 
 putr^ H«kham<3:nishiy^ Pars^ Tavsahya, putra Ariya 
 Ariya citr^ Thatiy Dar^y<3:v^(h)ush khshay<3:thiy^ 
 v^shna Aur^im^zdaha ima dahya.va tya ad^m a.gar- 
 bay^m ^ap^t^r^^m haca, Parsa *ad^msham patiya- 
 khsh^iy m^^na bajim ab^r^(n)t(a) ty^sham h^cam<a: 
 ath^hy a.va akunava(n) dat^m tya mana, a.\ta adari 
 Mad^ (H)uvrtj^ Vavthava Haraiva Bakhtrish Sugud<3: 
 (H)uvar^z<3:mish Zara(n)ka H^xr^uv^tish Th^t^gush 
 G<3:(n)dar<a; Hi(n)dush S<3;ka Humavarka, Saka. Tigr^- 
 kh^uda Babirush Athura Ar^bay<3J Mudraya Armin<a: 
 K.atapatuka Sparda ^Yauna Saka, ty^iy t^r^d^r^y^ 
 Skudr^ Y^una Takahara, Putiya Kushiya M^ciya 
 K<3:rka Thatiy Darayava(h)ush khshay«thiy<^ Aura- 
 
 vaazda. yatha. a.vaina imam bumim yu p^sav^- 
 
 dim m^na irahara mam khshay^thiy^m akun^ush 
 ad^m khshay<3:thiy^ amiy v<^shna Aur«m«zdaha ad^m- 
 shim gathva niyrt:shad<^y<a:m "^tyt-zsham ad^m ath^h^m 
 3iva akun<2:v«(n)ta y<3:tha mam kam« ah^ y<2diy^diy ty^ 
 5ciy^(n)k^mm ava dahyava tya, Dar^y^v^(h)ush 
 khshay^thiy^ adavaya p^tik^r^m didiy tyaiy ma- 
 na gathum b<2r<3:(n)tiy y^^tha ^khshnasah^dish ad<3;- 
 t^iy azda b^vatiy Pars^hya martiyahya dur^y arsh- 
 tish p^ragm<2ta adata\y azda b<2vatiy Pars^ mfl^rtiy^ 
 
 * apatar^m haca Parsa, 78. * adamsham potiyakhshaiy, 83, b. 
 ^Yauna, 86, b, Note 1. ■* tyarsham - akunava(n)ta, 60, A. •ciya{nj- 
 }s.axam ava dahyava, 86. * khsbaasabadisb, 83, B. 
 
8o 
 
 duray hacz Parsa hamaram patlya]ata Thatiy Dara- 
 y^v^(h)ush khshay^thiy<3: aita tya kartam ava vis^m 
 v^shna Aur^m<2zdaha akun^v^m Auramazd3.maiy 
 up^stam ahara yata kartam akunavam. mam Aura- 
 
 m^zda patuv haca, sar utam^iy vith<3:m uta imam 
 
 d<3:hyaum 'aita adam Aur^m<2zdam j<3;diyamiy aita- 
 maiy Aur<3:m^zda d^datuv M<2:rtiya hya Aur^m^^zdaha 
 fmmana h^uvt^iy g^sta ma thadaya p^thim tyam ras- 
 tam ma avarada ma starava, 
 
 b. 
 Baga vazraka Aur^m^zda hya aca f 
 
 - - m tya va ada shiyatim m<:2:rtiy^hya 
 
 - - u - - - a aruv^st<3:m up^riy Dar<3:y^v<3:(h)um khsha- 
 
 y<3:thiy<3:m iyasaya Thatiy Dar^y^v^(h)ush khsha- 
 
 yjzthiya v^shna Aumm<^zdaha kar 
 
 iy<3; tya a tarn ya d^ush 
 
 athiy n sh uva ya 
 
 yim k^rimish v^sim tya 
 
 r iya im riyish 
 
 ava - - m m m m dar ------ 
 
 ush a uvish a miy 
 
 ya astiy darshama da ya au 
 
 iyahya darshama 
 
 c. 
 
 Gauharuva Patishuv<3:rish Darayavahaush khshay^- 
 thiy^hya sharastihara. 
 
 d. 
 
 Asp<2C^na Darayavahaush khshay^thiy^hya isuvam 
 dasy^ma. 
 
 ly^m M^ciya. 
 
 1 a\ta adam Auramflzdam jadiyamiy, 64. 
 
VI. 
 
 THE INSCRIPTIONS OF XERXES. 
 The Inscriptions of Persepolis. 
 
 UPON EACH ONE OF THE FOUR PILLARS OF THE ENTRANCES TO THE 
 PALACE OF XERXES. 
 
 Baga vazvaka Aur^m^zda hya imam bumim ada 
 hya m^rtiy^m ada hya shiyatim ada m^rtiy^hya hya 
 Khsh<^yarsham khshay^thiy^^m akun<a;ush aiv^m p^ru- 
 nam iramRtRvam Ad<^m Khsh(^yarsha khshay^^thiy^a: 
 vazraka khshay<^thiy^ khshay^^thiyanam khshay^thiy^a; 
 d^hyunam p<2:ruvz<?nanam khshay^thiy^ ahyaya bu- 
 miya vrt:zr^kaya dur<^iy apiy Dar^^y^v^^h^ush khshay^- 
 thiy(^hya putr^ H(^kham<^nishiy(3: Thatiy Khsh^iyarsha 
 khshayrtthiy<^ v^zr^k^ v^shna Aurt^m^zdaha im^m 
 duv(^rthim vis^d^hyum ad^^m akun<^v^m v^siy ani- 
 y^shciy n^ib^m k^rt^m ^ana Parsa tya ad^^m akun^^;- 
 v^m utamaiy tya pita akun^^ush ty<7p<^tiy kartam 
 vainataiy n^^ib^^m a.va vis^^m v<^shna Aumm^zdaha 
 akuma Thatiy Khsh^yarsha khshayf^thiy^:? mam Aur^- 
 m^zda patuv utamaiy khsh«tr<^m uta ty^ m^na kar- 
 tam uta ty^m^iy pitri k^rt^m av^^shciy Aur^m^zda 
 patuv. 
 
 UPON THE PILLARS ON THE WESTERN SIDE OF THE PALACE. 
 
 Khsh^^yarsha khshay^thiy^ v^zr^^k^ khshay<^thiy^ 
 khshayrt;thiyanam Damyrtv^h^ush khshay<^thiy^hya 
 putr<^ H<^kham(^nishiy^. 
 
 1 ana Parsa, 73. 
 
82 
 
 Ea. 
 
 UPON THE WALL BY THE STEPS OF THE PALACE. 
 
 Baga vazraka Aur<7m<2zda hya imam bumim ada 
 hya av^m asman^m ada hya martlyam ada hya shiya- 
 tim ada martiyahyd, hya Khsh<3:yarsham khshay^- 
 thiy^m akun^^ush aiv^m p^runam khshay^thiy^m 
 3.ivam prt:runam fr<3;matar^m Adam Khsh^^yarsh^ 
 khshay<3;thiy^ vazraka khshay<3:thiy<^ khshay<2thiyanam 
 khshay<2thiy^ d^hyunam p^ruvz^nanam khshay^thiy^ 
 ahiyaya bumiya v<3;zr^kaya dur<^iy SipiyDsLvayavahaush 
 khshay<2thiy<3:hya putr^ Hrt;kham^nishiy<3: Thatiy 
 Khshi^yarsha khshay^thiy<3: vazraka v^^shna Auramaz- 
 daha ima h^dish adrt;m akunavam mam Aur<2m«zda 
 patuv h^da b<3:g^ibish utamaiy khsh<3:tr^m uta ty^m^iy 
 k^rt^m. 
 
 Eb. 
 
 Baga vazraka Aur^m^zda hya imam bumim ada 
 hya a.vam asman^^m ada hya m^rtiy<3:m ada hya shlya- 
 tim ada m^rtiy<3:hya hya Khsh^yarsham khshay^thi- 
 y^m akun^ush aiv<3:m p^runam khshay<3:thiy^m aiv^m 
 p^runam fr^matar^m Ad«m Khsh<3:yarsha khshay^j- 
 thiy^ vazraka khshay^thiy^ khshay^thiyanam khsha- 
 yathiya d(3:hyunam p^ruvz^nanam khshay^thiy^ 
 ahiyaya bumiya v^zr^kaya dur^iy apiy Darayava- 
 h^ush khshay<2thiy^hya putr^ H-^kham^nishiy^ Thatiy 
 Khsh^yarsha khshay<^thiy<3; vazraka v^shna Aur^m^z- 
 dah^ im^ h^dish ad<^m akun^v^m mam Aur^m^zda 
 patuv h^da b^g^ibish ut^m^iy khsh^tr^m uta tyam^iy 
 k^rt^m. 
 
 Ca. 
 
 UPON THE HIGHEST PILLAR NEAR THE SOUTHERN STEPS. 
 
 "Baga vazraka Aur^m^zda hy^ imam bumim ada 
 hy^ av^m asman^m ada hy^ m^rtiy^m ada shiyatim 
 ada m^rtiy^hya hy^ Khsh^yarsham khshayizthiy^m 
 
83 
 
 akun^ush aiv^m p^runam khshay^thiy^m aiv^m 
 p^runam iramat3.vam Ad^m Khsh(2yarsha khshay^- 
 thiya vazraka khshay<^thiy^ khshay^thiyanam khsha- 
 yathiya d^hyunam 'p<^ruv z^nanam khshay^thiy^ 
 ahyaya bumiya v<^zr^kaya dur^^iy apiy "Da-rayavahaush 
 khshay<3:thiy<3:hya putr^ H(a:kham^nishiy^ Thatiy 
 Khsh(^yarsha khshay^thiy^ v^zr^k^ v^shna Aur^hy^ 
 Mazd^ha ima h^^dish D 2.r ay av a (h)ush. khshay^thiy^ 
 akun<7ush hya mana. pita mam Aur<2m^zda patuv h^da 
 b^g^ibish uta ty«mrt:iy k^rt^m uta tyama'iy pitr<2 Da- 
 r^y<^vrth^ush khshay^thiyrt:hya kartam av^shciy Aura- 
 m^zda patuv h^^da b^g^zibish. 
 
 Cb. 
 
 Baga vazraka Aur^^m^izda hy^ imam bumim ada 
 hya av^m asman^^m ada hya m^rtiy^m ada hya shiya- 
 tim ada m^rtiy<7;hya hy<3! Khsh^yarsham khshay^- 
 thiy<^m akun<^ush aiv<?m p^runam khshay^thiy^m 
 aivam p^runam fmmatamm Ad^m Khsh^-yarsha 
 khshay(^thiy<2 vazraka khshay^thiy^ khshay^thiyanam 
 khshay^^thiy^ d^hyunam 'p^ruv z^nanam khshay^- 
 thiy^ ahyaya bumiya v^zr^kaya dur^^iy apiy Da.raya- 
 v^hrtush khshay^thiy^aihya putr^ H<a:kham^nishiy(3: 
 Thatiy Khsh^^yarsha khshay^thiy^ v^zr^k^ v^shna 
 Aur^hy^ M^zdah^ im^ h^^dish T)a.rayava(h)ush khsha- 
 yathiya akun^^ush hya mana, pita mam Aur^m^zda 
 patuv h^da b^^g^ibish uta ty<7m<^iy k^rt^m uta ty^- 
 maiy pitr^ Dar<^y<^v^h<7ush khshay<^thiy^hya k^rt^m 
 av^shciy Aumm^zda patuv h<2da b^g^ibish. 
 
 A. 
 
 UPON THE STEPS OF THE PALACE. 
 
 Baga vazraka Aur<7m<7zda hy^ imam bumim ada 
 av^m asman^m ada hy^ m^rtiy^m ada hy^ shiyatim 
 ada m«rtiy<?hya hy^ Khsh<^yarsham khshay^thiy^m 
 
 ^ paruv zananam, 104, Note. 
 
84 
 
 akun^ush aiv^m p<3:runam khshay^thiy^m aiv<3:m p^ru- 
 nam fr^^matamm Ad^m Khsh<^yarsha khshay^thiy^ 
 vazxaVa khshay<^thiy<3; khshay^^thiyanam khshay<7thiy(3: 
 d<2hyunam p^ruvz^nanam khshay^thiy<^ ahiyaya bu- 
 miya v^zr<2kaya ^wxa'iy apiy Dar(2y<^v<^h<2ush khshay^s:- 
 thiy^^hya putr<3; Hakham<^nishiy<^ Thatiy Khsh^yarsha 
 khshay^thiy<2: v^'zr^k^j; \.ya m<^na k^rt^^m ida uta X.ya- 
 mrt-iy apataram kartam a.va vis^m v^^shna Auramaz- 
 daha akun^v^m mam Aur^m^zda patuv h^da bagai- 
 bish utam<2iy khsh^tr^m uta tyamaiy kartam. 
 
8s 
 
 Inscription of Alvend. 
 F. 
 
 B^^^^ vazxaka Aur^m^zda Yiya m^thisht^ b^ganam 
 '\\ya imam bumim ada \iya av^m asman^m ada \iya 
 m^rtiy^m ada \iya shiyatim ada m^rtiy^hya hy<2: 
 Khsh^yarsham khshay^thiy^m akun^ush aiv<^m p^ru- 
 nam khshay<2thiy<3:m aiv^^m p^runam fr^matan^m 
 Ad^m Khsh^yarsha khshay^thiy*^; vazxaVa khshay^- 
 thiya khshay^thiyanam khshay^thiy^x d<3:hyunam 
 p^ruz<2nanam khshay<a:thiy^ ahiyaya bumiya vazxa- 
 kaya dur^iy apiy Dar^y^v^h^ush khshay^thiya hya 
 putr^ H^kham^nishiy^. 
 
S6 
 
 Inscription of Van. 
 
 K. 
 
 "Baga vazraka Aur(3:m<7zda hya m<^thlst^ haganam 
 hya imam bumim ada.hy<a; av<a;m asman^m ada hya 
 m^rt'iyavn ada hya shiyatim ada m^rtiy^hya hya 
 Khsh^yarsham khshay^thiytxm akun^ush aiv^m p^ru- 
 nam khshay^thiy^m aiv^m p^^runam tematar^m 
 Ad^m Khsh^yarsha khshay^thiy^^; vazvaka khshay<3:- 
 thiya khshay^thiyanam khshay<^thiy^ d^^hyunam ^pa- 
 ruv z^nanam khshay^thiy^ ahyaya bumiya v<3:zr^kaya 
 dur<^iy apiy 'Da.rayavahaush khshay<3;thiy<?hya putr^ 
 H«kham<2nishiy^ Thatiy Khsh^yarsha khshay^thiy^ 
 Dar^y^v^(h)ush khshay^thiy^ hya m^na pita hauv 
 v^shna Aur^m<^zdaha v^siy ty^ n^ib^m akun^ush uta 
 ima stan^m hauv niy^^shtay^^ k^(n)t^nmy yanaiy 
 dipim n^iy nipishtam akun^ush pasava ad^m niy^sh- 
 tay<3;m imam dipim nipisht<?n«iy (Mam Aur^^m^zda 
 patuv hada, b^g^ibish utam^iy khsh^tr^m uta tyamaiy 
 k^rt<a:m). 
 
 Qa. 
 
 UPON THE VASE OF COUNT CAYLUS. 
 
 Klish^yarsha khshay^thiy^ vazraka. 
 ^ paruv zananam, 104, Note. 
 
87 
 
 VII. 
 
 INSCRIPTIONS OF PERSIAN KINGS 
 
 AFTBR 
 
 XERXKS. 
 
 ARTAXERXES I. 
 
 Inscription at Venice. 
 Qb. 
 
 UPON THE VASE IN THE TREASURY OF ST, MARKS. 
 
 Ard«khc^shc<3; khshay<^thiy^ Yuzvaka. 
 
88 
 
 DARIUS II. 
 
 Inscriptions of Persepolis. 
 L. 
 
 ABOVE THE POSTS OF THE WINDOWS IN THE PALACE OF DARIUS 
 HYSTASPES. 
 
 Ard^stan^ 3.iha(n)gama Da.r ay avahaush khshay^- 
 thiyahya. vithiya karta. 
 
89 
 ARTAXERXES MNEMON.* 
 
 Inscriptions of Susa. (S.) 
 a. 
 
 UPON THE BASE OF THE PILLARS OF A SMALL ROW OF COLUMNS. 
 
 Ad^m Art«khsh<^tra khshsiyathiya wazxaVa khsha- 
 ya'Osxiya khshay<a:thiyanam 'Dar<3;y^v<3:(h)ush<3:hyakhsha- 
 y^thiy^hya putr<3;. 
 
 b. 
 
 UPON THE BASE OF THE PILLARS IN THE LARGE ROW OF COLUMNS. 
 
 Thatiy Atr^^khsh^tra khshay<3;thiy^ vazxaVa khsha- 
 y^thiy^ khshay^thiyanam khshay^thiy^ d^hyunam 
 khshay^thiy^a; ahyaya bumiya Dar^y^v^(h)ush^hya 
 
 1 Darayrtva(h)ushahya, 85, a; 24. 
 
 * An ingenious attempt to make syntax out of the loose construction 
 shown in these inscriptions of Artaxerxes Mnemon and Artaxerxes 
 Ochus, is the following: 
 
 Darfl'yav«(h)ush Vishtasp^hya nama putra "D. sohn eines mit na- 
 men V." Das folgende jedoch Vishtaspahya Arsham^^ nama putra 
 zeigt wie die vorhergehende genealogische aufzahlung eine anakoluthe 
 verbindung zweier nominative, von denen der eine zum andern im 
 genetivverhaltnis steht. So merkwiirdig das anakoluth in P) 
 ist, so wird es doch durch ein analogon gestiitzt: es entspricht 
 genau der construction Sz b) h^ca Pirava nama xavXa. In bei- 
 den fallen ist statt eines obliquen casus der nominativ gesetzt 
 in folge einer art verkiirzung einer bei den alten Persern haufigen 
 pleonastischen ausdruckweise; wie h<7ca — Pirav^ nama rayxia voll- 
 standig lauten miisste hrt-ca r^-uta — Piravii: nam^: xawia — hr/ca ada, 
 ebenso an unserer stelle m^'rtiyrthya — Arshamfl; nam^ mfl-rtiya — av«- 
 hya putr^. Eine solche lose anreihung zweier in abhangigkeitsver- 
 haltnis zu denkender glieder ist etwas ganz gewohnliches, z. b. Nisaya 
 namrt d<7hy<7ush — av^d^shim avaj'rn^m (Bh. I), (V^rumisa) nam^ 
 Pars« b«(n)d«ka av<zm ad^ra fraish^ya'm (II). Diese construc- 
 tionen unterscheiden sich von der unsrigen nur dadurch, dass die 
 wiederaufnahme des abhangigen satzgliedes durch eine oblique pro- 
 nominalform sowohl Sz b) wie an unserer stelle nicht stattgefunden 
 hat. Es ist eine jedermann verstandliche vercinfachung jener um- 
 standlichen und schwerfallinen ausdrucksweise. 
 
 In P) ist auch das wort nam^, welches urspriinglich die be- 
 dingung der anakoluthen construction ist, als entbehrlich iiber bord 
 geworfen: ArtokhshrttraDarayavrt(h)ush khshayathiy^ putra ist also die 
 
90 
 
 khshay^thly^hya putr^ Dar^y^v^(h)ush^hya Art^- 
 khsh^trahya khshayathiy^hya putr^ Art«khsh<3:trahya 
 Khsh^yarsh<a:hya khshay^thiy^hya putr<3: Khsh^yar- 
 sh^hya Dar<2y^v^(h)ush^hya khshay^thiy<3:hya putr<3: 
 Dar<a:y^v^(h)ush«hya Vishtashp^hya putr<3; Hakha.ma- 
 nishiy^ ^Imam a.pad2ina Da.rayava(h.)ush. ap^nyak<3:m<3f 
 ■akuiK^sh ahiyapara . . . .pa Art^khsh^tra nyak^m<3;. . . 
 Anahata uta Mithr*^ vashnsL Auramazdsha ap^dana 
 a.dam akunavam Aur^m^zda Anahata uta Mithr<3r 
 mam patuv . . . 
 
 weiterentwicklung und vereinfachung des Slteren typus Artakhsha- 
 tra khshay«thiyrthya — Dar«yavrt!{h)ush nam« khshay^thiyrt: — avahya 
 putr« ' 'A. sohn eines konigs — es ist ein konig Darius mit namen — 
 dessen sohn." 
 
 Noch eine andere eigenheit enthalt die inschrift, nSralich den gen- 
 etiv Vishtapahya, wo wir einen nominativ erwarten. Dieselbe 
 construction findet sich durchgangig in S. Die wiederholung 
 des namens im genetiv statt im nominativ dient zu emphatischer her- 
 vorhebung und ist eine assimilatorische anlehnung an den vorher- 
 gehenden genetiv, wahrend das subjekt aus dem genetiv zu erganzen ist: 
 Darayava(h)ushahya khshay^thiy^hya putr^, Dar^v^y^z(h)ushahya 
 (hy«) Artokhshatr^hya putr« "des Darius sohn, (jenes) Darius, (der) 
 des Artaxerxes sohn (war), jenes Artaxerxes, der des Xerxes sohn 
 war u. s. w. — 
 
 1 Imam apfldada, 85, b. 'akuntzsh, 43. 
 
91 
 
 ARTAXERXES OCHUS. 
 
 Inscription of Persepolis. 
 P. 
 
 UPON THE STEPS OF THE PALACE OF DARIUS HYSTASPES AND ARTA- 
 XERXES OCHUS. 
 
 Baga vazraka Aur^m^zda hya imam bumam ada 
 hya avam asmanam ada hya m<^rtiy^m ada hya shay^- 
 tam ada m<3:rtihya hya mam Art<2khsh<^tra khshay^- 
 thiya akun^ush aiv^m paruvna.Tn khshay^thiy^m 
 aivam p^^ruvnam iramataram Thatiy Artrt:khsh<2tra 
 khshay<3:thiy« vazraka khshayathiya khshay<^thiyanam 
 khshay^thiy<^ d^^hyunam khshay^^thiy^a: ahyaya bumiya 
 Adam Artakhsh<^tra khshay^^thiy^a: putr<3; Art<3;khsh^tra 
 D ar ay av a (h)ush khshay^^thiy^ putra Art<3:khsh(a:tra 
 khshay<^thiy<^ putr<^ Art^khsh<3:tra Khsh^yarsha khsha- 
 yathiya putr<3; Khsh^yarshaDar<3;y«v^(h)ush V(i)shtas- 
 p<a:hya nam^ putr^ V(i)shtasp<^hya Arsham<3: nam<3: 
 putra H<2kham(3:nishiyrt; Thatiy Art<2:khsh<3;tra khshay*^:- 
 thiy<a: im<^m us«t<3;sh^nam 'ath«(n)g«nam mam upa 
 mam k<3;rta Thatiy Art^khsh^tra khshayathiya mam 
 Aur^m<3:zda uta M(i)thr<3; haga patuv uta imam d<3;h- 
 yum uta ^ty^ mam k^rta. 
 
 1 'D3iTayava(h)ush, 85, c. ^ atha(n)g^mam, 85, d; 86, d. ^ tya mam 
 k^rta, 85, e and f. 
 
ARSACES. 
 R. 
 
 INSCRIPTION UPON THE SEAL OF GROTEFEND. 
 
 Arsh<3:k^ nama Athiyad^ush^n^hya putr^. 
 
THK 
 
 CUNEIFORM TEXT 
 
 OF th:^ 
 
 INSCRIPTIONS OF DARIUS 
 
 AT 
 
 ALVEND, SUEZ, PERSEPOEIS 
 
 AND 
 
 NAQSHI RUSTAM. 
 
 *The inscriptions are taken from a pen sketch made by the author. 
 
 For the Cuneiform text of the Behistan the student is referred to 
 the great work of Rawlinson in Vol. X of the Royal Asiatic Society 
 of Great Britain and Ireland. The author is under much obligation 
 to Dr. Kossowicz, Professor of Sanskrit in the Imperial University of 
 St. Petersburg. 
 
/,,«K.9!»Af-JVr/f>' 
 
 THE TOMB OF DARIUS. 
 
The 
 Cuneiform kiVHA BET. 
 
 fGvrTumi fn A 
 
 Jtautal 11 I Sonant Sibiunj h^l z 
 
 I i 
 
 GuTT(;KM_ yt K ((Y BEFORE U) «TI KH' <TK(<£^B£r^7?E v) 
 
 >^\A/ («^ BEFORE U) 
 
 ■p4L/iTAL y<>- 1:. 
 
 LmGUAL^lK ("-({mroKBU) AsVlRATlOH (^^{ 
 
 DE/vr>iL T£5 
 
 NUMERALS 
 h Vr^ <T// <?^^ H- 
 
 £TC. ^TC. 
 
 A WEDGR SLOPING OBLIQUELY SEPARATES EACH WORD. 
 

 '•.'"^:#' -^? 
 
0) 
 
 >M^T5m ft r<»m \ mrrnr \ <k h- \ r<\\ t<> nr 
 
 jlrl ff -m ^ trr fr rr 'I -TtI ^T 5 TTI ^^ /<- <M T<> Yn\«<T<>\ 
 
 ^^ ^Yt £^r r<» T£ (rr-m \ «n ?< rrr r<' t<t ft r<»Mim<r<rr 
 
 'Mffr 5TtT m ^r>Irn. 
 
 KT ff T<> vmT»T^YY$ ^ «Yy^ rrr r<> kty? r<^ x«ymn? 
 T<'T<r n r<> rrr Mm' nr \ «Tr n m r<> r<r r7 r<> "( n <?< T<><fr 
 
 - r<> 1 m <>^< T<> nr r<> JtV t ^r <ff T<? rf r<> rTr X '-feT^'r 
 
(SL) 
 
 a^ 
 
 <HK>ml<'m \ jT<rTr<Jnr<>frr ~t >r&M^rrstrr 
 
 <^<UA ffr>rH>M1 fyr r£>rrrm5<'rrr X mfy yfr^ 
 ^><r<>T ff>TrT m>rrnir<rr K^frM-^mnm^ <J<r<>^ 
 
 >rri^rjrrrffr<»M\ mtrm ^ <kt<> \ t<ff r<> ^r 
 K<&^r8r^r\jwr<>vr^r»y^rrj>rYr\»wr<> v 
 
 i. ^ rr>rrr 1 fr ffr^E rr<»m <n U ^ i<K \ i<l< ^r 
 H m > M 1 KK 1 Tr <K T<> <r^ K m > M T ^ > « <rr> ter» ) 
 HrnHWr>m\HlC\ ni<H1<^mr<> rrr \ ^r<fr m ff 
 
 Krr r(> m « * irT m R»rrr \ n>m m > W ^ r<><rr5^ r7 
 r<> m -M \ r-' rrr k ff t<> i <j< ^> fr, i ^ f? ^ r jp,.^i 
 *< m >rrT "I fer <?r 5 w 1 J yrr r<> \ ^<> (rrn ^m mu^ 
 
>m^ff T<"Trr \ T<> <rr riff y<>frr X ft>ri5 \T<>r<r?rr'< 
 
 iM m UK fr> ?rr 1 K> Tfi ^ ' hi m > m X r<> <?r>rs t? 
 
 tfi fr.'M \ ff fWEii<»rs<tie<\i<T<i 
 
 ;. m <fr Sl>yrrr»Trr m \ >]'^l»]^1Y> \ c>< r<> X 
 
 r£ r<»r£<?r> rry\ «/! s m r<> r<r i^ i<»iii \ mrrrr nA 
 <^<<rrSrfr<>\«ry^f?>MU«£r?njr^r\>r£r5Km\ 
 W <rr £r>yry y»y ri m <»< m t f? m sr y<» r& <ry ?< \ 
 «rrr<fYry<>y<yfrr<>\ 
 
 4 y<y ?rr jw ff y<> i f? m £yy<»r^<n?< ^ «yy r< frr 
 
 1<>K1iiH>\HU»h1 1 ??<Ky<>m <rrr< \%n't^llB\ 
 
 ilriK'ni'M \ >iiU<vi \ m<?T £r>y»yy»yrT m \ 
 <rr>yry^y?rTyyf y<> 'm\>i^ro<m\ifiin^My'ir»ifim 
 «yrs^ry<>y<yffy<><Ky<>rTr i <K?r>m '\?ryKffr<> 
 
 KmU<ffy<>\?yrr^y7£>'Trrr?K'\ 
 
 5. y<y trr ?m n y<> Ur m £yy<» y e <^ ^ i «yy^?rr 
 y<>y<rny<>i >yrrKmi ^i<^^i>hu»inm\^n 
 i^^m-m \ 5r^ryrr'<fr>yfci kkyiWi i j^ffKr ff 
 nn'^1 >>r<rrfrjyff<<Ufr'yir?rr^n>yirm>rrr \ w 
 
U.VX'/ERSITT 
 
<?<rY>rri <i< ?h< ?rr y<>fry 1 <><rr'm\<^i^rr<m<>m 
 
 'M rfr -rrT '\ Tr <K r<> nr <fr>/Tr 1 -Trr frr X rr' KKj ff 
 
 r<> rr ^ -Trr m ^ <>< ?? k m \ 'M m \ <^y <?f ^ n r<> m 
 
 T<> mK 'M \ >r(^Tr ff r<' ffr Kn'fT<> t m<fr ST> TrT 
 
 r>'r rr ffr>Trn<Kr'i m \ ft ff T<r ff J Tff ^ 1 '>r<rrn ^r ff ?< t 
 
 fn f f ' lit > TrT f f r <' \ frt <fr fc r >ri1 1» r ff fn l fr n fn 
 
 rrT><fi>y£UKfrm'\ftffy<Tff>'m^vr<ry'fiJTff^A. 
 r<rff K>vr£T'>r£Tr5\«rrs fn T<>Krffr<> \ «rr^ m 
 
 K> K1 fr T<> fn K ffrM A «/Tr< Tn T<> T<T ff K> 1 f?4< T<><f? 
 
 Krfr'Mi »rrrK'ffsm'M"i ^>«<rrKm>rrri f^ff 
 
 ?<?Trr rTy T£ ^<K r<> rTr 1 ^<ff ^ A <5<«Tr m> mK ff 
 
 i KT ffr im ff r<> ^ ff ffr ST T<»T^<rrr< A «Tr^ m 
 K'KTff T<> \ ']^V< ?< fn \ ffr (ff^l'hl '{^'In rTr<>'< m 
 ff'M fn 1 ff<J(K> rYr>rS \ -M K>ni \ fii ff'W 1 frf ff 
 ^r^ ff K'\ <><rr ffr \ ffr K m \ fr ffr ^r T£ fn A n W 
 ^tffi \ MK'ffr XKKf-rrTr'HA frr JMSTT £ "< > TrT 
 KrTr \ ?r fft K^ if>Jrr\ ffr ^T^T "\ <rr>T£>y<X -m ffi n "^ 
 K rn ? r ff ' « <fr U 1 ffr ^r q rfr T<> \ fft T<r <ff ^ T m^<><rr 
 ff ^I rr T<> ffr \ ffr & r T <> ff K 1 r? j W mrPin n \ rs ^■ 
 srff \T<><rr >< rYr\ sW K-ff K' X (rf ^ KKK' w \ <ff 
 ''hi rn \ ilrl K' rf K- \ v ^n<><KK> m \ (irfW frr \ 
 
Off T*« 
 
>Tm «rr rr n n "\ m <rr urn a <rr> rs frr^rr'-irK^ n k>\ 
 T<r> Trr <'^'<rr^\<i'<'^i <rr> i^^m n t<. \ <*< n <£ r w^ \ 
 
 3. KT m 5 M rf r<' \ fr m £ T T<> ' i^<ry ^ X «rr^rr 
 
 Y<'T<Tffr<> X K>^riffT<> \ frr>r^r<rfrr X 'TrTKf? 
 K> m <K r<> \ <K rr> nr \ m K ff K- '>< nf \ 'B rfr \ m 
 
 r. ffr 'W ^ m <K>rrr yf r<> \ <k k> m \ <^r<rr>T£ rr 
 ^ 'Ttt 'Trr 1 t^ ff K> m J w ff ^ \ ffr «n s 5 rrr m \ 
 
 nj ilri K> \ fr'TrJ rTr-TrrX i^ rlKl> M \. 
 
 (B) 
 
 rYfry£rT<>'r^<rr^ ^ «rT^mr<>Krrfr<'^>m 
 r»r^TTM «]rr< m k> Kin t<> \ «jj^inK> KUrmr 
 
 Krrr>rrr \ «Trs ffr T<> K) Tr K> A THK K'<ff K m> Trl \ 
 n ff t< ?Trr rTr Tfc W <K /<> ffr X ^ <rr S 1 <K «rr ?fr>M»(f? 
 ^ff T<> X <!<K' \ H>'{iUM \ >1iirr'^l'm \ iTriUfi 
 
ftfiARy 
 
 Tr»t» 
 
 
(A/^; 
 
 cu 
 
 MTOTM 'r^r"r^T<> \ ffr<fTsr»rTrr"mrri 
 
 <?<T<> \ff> M m>TrT\5T<rr K^ ff -Trr X mfrfTr A <KTn 
 frt'T^'M \ m T^'W tTt K' MX trrff fn ^ <KT<>\ 
 
 'W^i^rrff K»rrr ^ mfrfrM <Kr<> x^nK-m 
 
 ^TrTrf'TrrAfrrfrfrrVrrrST^Mffr<><Kr<> frr \ <KY<>\ 
 
 fr ffr £T 7<>>T^<rr> MX «Tr i< frr r<> r<rf^ r<>'rrn?rr<i<fr 
 
 K<t't^\ ffr n'r^>rTriW'«<rr>r^Kfn>rrT\«n?<rrr 
 K> Kr fr K' > W 1 ffr ff > /£ > TrM ^ K< <rT > te K rTyTrn 
 T«£T>Mm>'rrr?Hr>rrn 
 
 2. frr?T'Trr\fr ffrferr<'>r£<rrK '^ «TTsrrr<>Kr?^ 
 r<> ^ •T^r-r^rr> \ i(Si r< m r<- r<r ff K- \ «nr< frrK> 
 
 KT ff r(> ffr ?< m ' hJ \ «Tr r< frr K' Kf ff 1<> 1 r'r (K r<'<rr 
 K ffr ' Trr A ,1 ii 1^frh>U< fTi K fTr >m \ «Jm in K> 
 Kl ff r<> "I ffr <K r<> rTr K' fn V>1 <^ ra fi K> fn \ 'T£ 1>>1 
 TSTJrTrK'ffrX <£ T <fr ^ r f f /<> rnfrfiK'^rrntoMm 
 T^ ?r <K K> rTr \ ^ <rr ^ \ <K «rr ffr > M K ff ^ -ff K> 1 
 
 ?r m srr^ 1 ^ ffr fcrm<K k> frrU <fr frm^'inK>\ 
 
 ffrfenfr<'\fr'ffSV 
 .5. KTfrr^Mff r<> x ff ffr^rK>'r£<rrS i «rr^ rr 
 
 T<> Kf ff K' 1 'TS tiKrrx\m <fr ^ r> rrr 1'>in m <"< ffr \ 
 rf 'Irr rTr \ ff <K /<> ffr '!£ X -h] K- m \ ffr TrhJ A in 
 
 <Tr sr-T rTr K»/Tr \ frr r^Jhr^T' rrr \ <Kff' frr\f,m 
 ^ T^ fn \ fTr rr>mr< ffi'hnfr' m ff k> «nt< f f r<' i 
 
 'MKrTr \ 'Trfr 'r<7f>rrr A m^J^l \ ^rlK- 
 T<ni 'TtT \ <KfT> ffr>Trr A rnKT «<!<> \ fTr-I^ A frr<T<ff 
 K>T^ \ rf rtr fTrT'Trr \ ^hl K> "I -rrTKrTr \ m if W \ 
 

m fr ffr £T f? V Trl ffr ft \<Sr>r^>K\^^1Kr>1'^\<K-^in 
 
 <s'<fT ?j \ <TT>fT m ^1 \ <>< ff fr <rr r< \ T^ r'> m \ <«rr 
 
 >hl> T^ ^ T 75 ffr A T^ T! ffr A ''TtT ff <Tr' ^ r «.V <ff fr ffr \ 
 IT ffr >Tff -« <fr ^ \ ffr KT <fr ^T rTr A ffr £ r^T ffr K> \ 
 £<- <fr fr ^r ffr r<'"A r^^TKs ff K \ T>;frrW rrr><fr /J \ 
 T^ ^ ^ r fr \ K' (r-r K \ T^ T- ffr ^ > Trr T<> ff K A ^TrT ^ r fr 
 HTK' A m<T<T'-rfrST\K«^rKfff A '/r/P-r^r rTr A 
 W<ff -Trfff K' T'fr \ <T <fr ^ ff K- ffr \'rrrfr>fr K- rrr\ 
 t>STT;ffr\. 
 
 4-^ KT ffrJ/rTif K> A Tt ffr ^TK"r&<r'rr< \ «rTe? rr 
 K>T<' tf T<> \ ffr <ff ^T>Trrr>>Tff frr \ T<> KW\ fn-rs ff 
 K A ff 'Trr rrr - TrT \ >'T <rr K- fr * m \ K- <ri ^ ^ Tfe rTr >r£ 
 ^TTff'TrT \ 'MKffr \ K<fcT rTr ^T^T \ ^r/f Wr >M \ 
 «Tr 5 ffr T<> KT ff K> > Trr A rTr <T <r'r K<rr ^ A ffr rr> /rT \ 
 «TT^ ffr T<> T<T ff T<' \ rTr T<> ff K- \>J^r<Kfn\lTi<rr^1 
 •TrT T» T ff ffr <K rTr \ rTr fr > lij r< if > m A <rP rTr r<r >r£ ffr \ 
 Kff K> ^ ffr fr T<» Trr V Trr r<> S ffr > rrr "^ m fr 'M^mK1 
 ^<'hl A rTr >r^ \ rrr <T <fT K'TS -TrT ffr \ r<> r<r m\ 
 
 >Trr ffr >rji \ r? ffr > frr 1 fri <K A r<> ^ rr ff r<> ?, ^ rr ff r<> i 
 
 >TrTKff K>irr<KK>\'hJK> \ fr>ff r<> V'-^l^M A ffr 
 'Tfe ffr A ff <K r<' ffr 'Tfe 1 ?rrr r<' m\nm^rK- 'Jt<m\ 
 «ir Z< fff T<> KT rfK'\niriffr^rK'\^ >hl ff r>' fe /> rrr \ 
 
 ^rfff^TTffr<> \ '>hiK>nu>\ >hu<.m \ (wfrr 
 r<r <ff 'Trr \ ii'^vmif r<> \ k> ki m \ «n ^ k mi^ m 
 
 <»<S TT ff ^ \ ffiff n^l n K' \ m l"iri fn \ '1>1^ iTr 
 ililnU \ WTTr^rT^<><T<>ffr 1 'm>^l^m ff r<> 
 
 <j<T<> fff \ <£r <rT fer r<> a fff sr^ ^rrr ff s A ^ sTffr 
 

 <'<fr'ffr VWfTr^rr 
 
 m A <«<> ri-r ^ T' rrr 1 w ^mh k-k 
 
 S. KT m^M n K> \ fr ffr ^TT<>'r^<rrT^ \ «Tmm 
 
 i^ffT^^Trf 1 'i^z<Kfrr \fri <ri^i'hjr>'rrrm^< ffr\ 
 
 TV <T (t*? K >r^ 'Mn ffr <rr ^r> Wr-irr ^r'Mr? r<> -K?? 
 
 ^rTs^rrrfTr>rrrxm>'T^r\T<> fTr^Mrff \r>^r5rrr> TrrA 
 ffr <r <fT K ^r^ ' rrr\ ' hi m ^ rri i m <rr ^r > rrr r»rrr fn\ 
 
 m fr > rrr \ m fr • hn fff <ff '^I'lrU'^rrifn'rin^ ks rr r? 
 
 T<' frr K> ff K' 1 m n ^hP lit if K- \ ffr <rr EI- ni I^^Jfi ffr\ 
 
 frff m rrf' <n > rs i -rr/^r^ m a )<> m \ <k r<> rTr ■; frr <fr 
 
 ?Mrrr»rrr frr 4< rTr 1 K'^Vhl frr Km \ <K <Si ' 1^ 
 
 ^Trrff T<> ^ (ir rs^Tjr rTr VM m \ Ki r^r r<> Arj<rff>/rn 
 
 jItI T<> iTr >Trr ^ £/ m r£ JTrr rTr > frr \ >hl rTr ^ rTr>rfe 
 
 ^Tff\>rrrrTr \mfrrr£r>/£\. 
 
 / ?r<Tr \ 'TfcT->r^rT'> a rTr<fT^T>Trrr-7ffffr\ 
 
 <KK' \ rTr r^ frr K< • 'Trr\^MK' \ -m rTr 
 
 frfrrA r<ff K> ffr -Mff-rrT \ >M£T^rrrf?r<><KT<> ffrX 
 
 <fr ffr A frr >« <fr * /£ /£ ^ /rT > TrT \ <fTW Si ff /<> \ 
 
 ff ffr £TT<»r£<fr'rrr\ «Tr ^ ffr r<> KI ff T<»rrr ^ ff t<> 
 
 1. KT ffr >M H K 1r1 ffr£TK»I^<fr r< \ «Tr 5ffrK> 
 
TJNIVERSITT 
 
 ]?£! ^n<> A mK>\ fu \ ^hJ>m K>\ 
 
 fr ^rm-rrr A frrrr r<> m<fr nK'<KK> m^ 
 
 fr frr ^ r r<' > rs <K <rr ^ \ «TRf ^ ffr K> K T ff K' <J < /<> rTr \ 
 T<> KI ff K' <>< K' frr 1 ff /^<fr > m ffr > rr/ A frffr riEr<> 
 
 ffK»rTl\>7rrrr>nr<>fr/\ 
 
TRANSLATION 
 
 OF THE 
 
 INSCRIPTIONS. 
 
THE "SEPULCHRAL' INSCRIPTION OF 
 CYRUS. (M.) 
 
 (PERSIAN, MEDIAN, ASSYRIAN.) 
 
 The oldest inscription of Persia is found on that 
 structure generally believed to be the tomb of Cyrus. 
 At Pasargadse, in the midst of the plain of Murghab, 
 stands a building of white marble rising to the height 
 of thirty-six feet from the ground. Its base is forty- 
 seven feet long and forty-four feet broad. A figure in 
 bas-relief carved on a pillar, perhaps the portrait of 
 the king himself, strengthens the theory that this 
 structure is the tomb of Cyrus. A narrow doorway 
 leads into an inner chamber, where Arrian says, the 
 body of Cyrus was placed. Under the relief is the 
 cuneiform inscription, the translation of which follows: 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 I (am) Cyrus, the king, the Achaemenide. 
 
 For the sake of comparison the reader is referred 
 to the epitaph of Cyrus quoted byStrabo, (XV, 3.) 
 
Ii8 
 
 THE INSCRIPTION OF DARIUS HYSTASPES 
 AT BEHISTAN.* (Bh.) 
 
 (PERSIAN, [median, ASSYRIAN.]) 
 
 1. I (arn) Darius, the great king, the king of kings, 
 the king of Persia, the king of countries, the son of 
 Hystaspes, the grandson Arshama, the Achaemenide. 
 
 2. Says Darius the king my father (is) Hystaspes, the 
 father of Hystaspes (is) Arshama, the father of Ars- 
 hama (is) Ariyaramna, the father of Ariyaramna (is 
 Caispis), the father of Caispis (is) Achaemenes. 
 
 3. Says Darius the king therefore we are called the 
 Achaemenides: from long ago we have extendedf from 
 long ago our family have been kings. 
 
 4. Says Darius the king VIII. J of my family (there 
 were) who were formerly kings: I am the IX: individ- 
 ually we were (lit. are) kings. 
 
 5. Says Darius the king by the grace of Aura- 
 mazda I am king : Auramazda gave me the king- 
 dom. 
 
 6. Says Darius the king these are the countries 
 which came to me : by the grace of Auramazda I 
 became king of them, Persia, Susiana, Babylon, As- 
 syria, Arabia, Egypt, which are by the sea, Sparda, 
 Ionia, Media, Armenia, Cappadocia, Parthia, Drangi- 
 ana, Area, Chorasmia, Bactriana, Sogdiana, Gandara, 
 Saka, Thatagus, Haravatis, Maka, in all (there are) 
 XXIII countries. 
 
 *This inscription contains nearly one thousand lines. Cf. Intro- 
 duction. 
 
 fThe Persian word amata is connected with the Sanskrit root ma to 
 measure (Cf. Zend ma and Latin me-to). The A is doubtless a prefix 
 corresponding to the Sanskrit a (hither), amata would mean meas- 
 ured hither or to the present time, i.e., reaching to the present. It is 
 possible to emphasize the idea of the root ma (measure): hence the 
 word might signify measured, tested, tried. 
 
 :}:The numerals are represented by horizontal wedges for units and 
 oblique for the tens. Cf. Cuneiform alphabet 
 
119 
 
 7- Says Darius the king these (are) the countries 
 which came to me : by the grace of Auramazda they 
 became subject to me : they bore tribute to me : 
 what was commanded to them by me this was done 
 night and (lit. or) day. 
 
 8. Says Darius the king within these countries 
 what man was a friend* him well supported I sup- 
 ported : who was an enemy him well punished I pun- 
 ished ; by the grace of Auramazda these countries 
 followed my law : as it was commanded by me to 
 them, so it was done. 
 
 9. Says Darius the king Auramazda gave me the 
 kingdom : Auramazda bore me aid until this kingdom 
 was established : by the grace of Auramazda I hold 
 this kingdom. 
 
 10. Says Darius the king this (is) what (was) done 
 by me after that I became king ; Cambyses by name, 
 the son of Cyrus (was) of our family: he before was 
 king here : of this Cambyses there was a brother 
 Bardiya (i. e., Smerdis) by name possessing a com- 
 mon mother and the same father with Cambyses ; 
 afterwards Cambyses slew that Bardiya: when Cam- 
 byses slew Bardiya there was not knowledge t (on 
 the part) of the state that Bardiya was slain : after- 
 wards Cambyses went to Egypt : when Cambyses 
 went to Egypt, after that the state became hostile, 
 after that there was deceit to a great extent in the 
 provinces, both Persia and Media and other prov- 
 inces. 
 
 11. Says Darius the king afterwards there was one 
 man, a Magian, Gaumata by name ; he rose up from 
 Paishiyauvada ; there (is) a mountain Arakadris, by 
 
 * The Persian word is of doubtful interpretation. It looks like the 
 NOMEN AGENTis of GAM to go^ a goer hither or a comer. The transla- 
 tion /rzVwo' is a conventional one. 
 
 f AZDA, a doubtful word. I connect it with the root da to ktww 
 which occurs in the compound aur^m^zda. 
 
120 
 
 name; from there on the 14th day* of the month 
 Viyakhna then it was when he rose up : he then de- 
 ceived the state ; I am Bardiya the son of Cyrus 
 brother of Cambyses : afterwards the whole state be- 
 came estranged from Cambyses fand) went over to 
 him, both Persia and Media and the other provinces: 
 he seized the kingdom ; on the 9th day of the month 
 Garmapada then it was he thus seized the kingdom ; 
 afterward Cambyses died by a self-imposed death, f 
 
 12. Says Darius the king this kingdom which 
 Gaumata the Magian took from Cambyses, this king- 
 dom from long ago was (the possession) of our family : 
 afterwards Gaumata the Magian took from Cambyses 
 both Persia and Media and the other provinces ; he 
 acted in accordance with? his own power? he be- 
 came king. 
 
 13. Says Darius the king there was not a man 
 neither a Persian nor Median nor any one of our fam- 
 ily who could make Gaumata the Magian deprived of 
 the kingdom ; the state feared him vehemently (or 
 because of his violence) ; he would smite the state 
 utterly which knew the former Bardiya ; for this rea- 
 son he would smite the state that it might not know 
 mej that I am not Bardiya the son of Cyrus; anyone 
 did not dare to say anything against Gaumata the 
 Magian until I came ; afterwards I asked Auramazda 
 for help; Aurama/da bore me aid; on the loth day 
 of the month Bagayadis then it was I thus with (my) 
 faithful? men slew that Gaumata the Magian and 
 
 *Lit. with fourteen days; a use of the instrumental which denotes 
 the association of time with an event. This idiom is employed in all 
 like temporal expressions. Cf. Grammar, 72. 
 
 t The word uv^MrtRSHiYUSH can be divided into xjva self [Ci. Skt. 
 swa Lat. se) and MrtRSHivusH die (Cf. Skt. m^r Lat. morior). The 
 meaning also corresponds to the statement in Herodotus III 64-65, 
 that Cambyses died from a wound inflicted by his sword as he was 
 leaping from his horse. 
 
 X Note the direct form of expression. 
 
121 
 
 what men were his foremost allies; there (is) a strong- 
 hold Sikayauvatis by name ;^ there is a province in 
 Media Visaya by name ; here I smote him ; I took 
 the kingdom from him ; by the grace of Auramazda I 
 became king : Auramazda gave me the kingdom. 
 
 14. Says Darius the king — the kingdom which 
 was taken away from our family, this I put in (its) 
 place; I established it on (its) foundation; as (it was) 
 formerly so I made it ; the sanctuaries ? which Gau- 
 mata the Magian destroyed I restored. The com- 
 merce ? of the state and the cattle and the dwelling 
 places, and (I did this) in accordance withf the 
 clans, which Gaumata the Magian took from them, 
 (I restored) ; I established the state on (its) founda- 
 tion both Persia and Media and the other prov- 
 inces ; as (it was) formerly so I brought back what 
 (had been) taken away ; by the grace of Auramazda 
 this I did ; I labored that our clan I might establish 
 in (its) place; as (it was) formerly, so (I made it); I 
 labored by the grace of Auramazda that Gaumata 
 the Magian might not take away our race. 
 
 15. Says Darius the king this (is) what I did, after 
 that I became king. 
 
 16. Says Darius the king when I slew Gaumata the 
 Magian afterwards there (was) one man Atrina by 
 name the son of Upadara(n)ma; he rose up in Uvaja; 
 (i. e. , Susiana) ; thus he said to the state; I am king 
 in Uvaja; afterwards the people of Uvaja became re- 
 bellious (and) went over to that Atrina; he became 
 king in Uvaja; also there (was) one man a Babylon- 
 ian Naditabira by name the son of Ain . . . . ; he rose 
 up in Babylon; thus he deceived the state; I am Na- 
 
 *Nam^ is not the accusative of specification, but is attracted into 
 the case, and even the gender of the subject. Lit. there is a strong- 
 hold (its) name (is) Sikayauvatis. Cf. Grammar, 61, A. Note 2, but 
 cf. Bartholomae, Arische Forsch. I, 58. 
 
 f Cf. Grammar, 70, A. 
 
122 
 
 bukudracara the son of Nabunita; afterwards the 
 whole of the Babylonian state went over to that Nad- 
 itabira; Babylon became rebellious; the kingdom in 
 Babylon he seized. 
 
 17. Says Darius the king afterwards I sent forth 
 (my army) to Uvaja; this Atrina was led to me 
 bound; I slew him. 
 
 18. Says Darius the king afterwards I went to 
 Babylon against that Naditabira who called himself 
 Nabukudracara; the army of Naditabira held the 
 Tigris; there he halted and was on shipboard; after- 
 wards I destroyed the army one (army) I made 
 
 submissive, of the other I led; Auramazda bore 
 
 me aid; by the grace of Auramazda we crossed the 
 Tigris; here the army of Naditabira I slew utterly; 
 on the 27th day of the month Atriyadiya then it was 
 we thus engaged in battle. 
 
 19. Says Darius the king afterwards I went to 
 
 Babylon; when to Babylon ; 
 
 there (is) a town Zazana by name along the Eu- 
 phrates; there this Naditabira who called himself Na- 
 bukudracara went with his army against me to engage 
 in battle; afterwards we engaged in battle; Auramazda 
 bore me aid; by the grace of Auramazda the army 
 
 of Naditabira I slew utterly 
 
 the water bore it away; on the 2nd day of the month 
 Anamaka then it was we thus engaged in battle. 
 
123 
 
 II. 
 
 1. Says Darius the king afterwards Naditabira with 
 (his) faithful ? horsemen went to Babylon; afterwards 
 I went to Babylon; by the grace of Auramazda I both 
 seized Babylon and seized that Naditabira; afterwards 
 I slew that Naditabira at Babylon. 
 
 2. Says Darius the king while I was in Babylon 
 these (are) the provinces which became estranged 
 from me, Persia, Uvaja, Media, Assyria, Armenia, 
 Parthia, Magus, Thatagus, Saka. 
 
 3. Says Darius the king there (was) one man Mar- 
 tiya by name, the son of Cicikhris — there (is) a town 
 in Persia Kuganaka by name — here he halted; he 
 rose up in Uvaja; thus he said to the state; I am 
 Imanis king in Uvaja. 
 
 4. Says Darius the king then* I was near by Uvaja; 
 
 afterwards from me the people 
 
 of Uvaja seized that Martiya who was chief of them 
 and slew him. 
 
 *01d Persian ad<7k^iy. For various theories respecting the meaning 
 and derivation of ad;7K<7iy, cf. F. Miiller (Wiener Zeitschrift fur d. k. 
 des Morgenlandes in), 150, Bartholomae (Bezz. Beiter X. 272). The 
 theory contained in a late number of the Zeitschr. f. vergl. Sprchfg. 
 is especially deserving of mention. The first element of the compound 
 is Ava (Cf . Skt. adh^, Lat. inde, Gr. pvOa) and the second contains the 
 stem of the interrogative pronoun, Ka, (Cf. Skt. ca, Lat. que, Gr. rs) 
 Cf. Lat. TUN-c. ,,Den indefiniten und enclitischen gebrauch des 
 fragestamms finden wir abgesehen von andern sprachen (z. b. gr. 
 Ttoiy 7t7]) auch im apers. ciy (*qid), welches einerseits den interro- 
 gativstaram selbst indefinit macht (k^rshsciy), andererseits adverb eine 
 indefinite nebenbedeutung verleiht (p^/ruv^/mciy ,,fruher'). Genau 
 wiedas eben angefiihrte p^ruv<?mciy ist unser ad(^?k^7iy gebildet: das 
 dem -ciy entsprechende kaiy hat nur eine andere casusform. Deren 
 locativische function ist bewahrt (,,in einem gewissen punkte"), hat 
 aber in verbindung mit der zeitpartikel eine temporale bedeutungs- 
 modification erhalten. ad<^?-krtiy bedeutet demnach ,,da zu einer ge- 
 wissen zeit" ,,da einmal" d. i. ..damals. " Die deutsche partikel 
 ,'damals" und adr?k<7iy stimmen also nicht nur in der bedeutung, 
 sondern auch in der bildungsweise und bedeutungsentwicklung voU- 
 koramen tiberein." 
 
124 
 
 5- Says Darius the king one man Fravartis by- 
 name, a Mede, he rose up in Media; thus he said to 
 the state; I am Khshathrita of the family of Uva- 
 khshatara; afterwards the Median state which was in 
 clans became estranged from me (and) went over to 
 that Fravartis; he became king in Media. 
 
 6. Says Darius the king the Persian and Median 
 army, which was by him, it was faithful ? (lit. a faith- 
 ful (.?) thing); afterwards I sent forth an army; Vi- 
 darna^ by name, a Persian, my subject him I made 
 chief of them; thus I said to them; go smite that Me- 
 dian army which does not call itself mine; afterwards 
 this Vidarna with the army went away; when he came to 
 
 Media there (is) a town in Media by 
 
 name — here he engaged in battle with the Medes; 
 he who was chief among the Medes did not then hold 
 (the army) faithful.?; Auramazda bore me aid; by 
 the grace of Auramazda the army of Vidarna smote 
 that rebellious army utterly; on the 6th day of the 
 month Anamaka then it was the battle (was) thus 
 fought by them; afterwards my army — there (is) a 
 region Kafmjpada by name — there awaited me until 
 I went to Media. 
 
 7. Says Darius the king afterwards Dadarsis by 
 name, an Armenian, my subject, him I sent forth to 
 Armenia; thus I said to him; go, the rebellious army 
 which does not call itself mine smite it; afterwards 
 Dadarsis went away; when he came to Armenia, after- 
 wards the rebellious ones having come together went 
 
 against Dadarsis to engage in battle a village 
 
 by name in Armenia; here they engaged in 
 
 battle; Auramazda bore me aid; by the grace of Aura- 
 mazda my army smote that rebellious army utterly; 
 on the 6th day of the month Thuravahara then it wa^ 
 thus the battle (was) fought by them. 
 
 *Cf. Grammar, 6i, A, and note i. 
 
125 
 
 8. Says Darius the king a second time the rebel- 
 lious ones having come together went against Dadar- 
 sis to engage in battle; there (is) a stronghold, Tigra 
 by name, in Armenia — here they engaged in battle; 
 Auramazda bore me aid; by the grace of Auramazda, 
 my army smote that rebellious army utterly; on the 
 1 8th day of the month, Thuravahara then it was the 
 battle (was) thus fought by them. 
 
 9. Says Darius the king a third time the rebellious 
 ones having come together went against Dadarsis to 
 engage in battle; there (is) a stronghold, U. . . .ama 
 by name, in Armenia — here they engaged in battle; 
 Auramazda bore me aid; by the grace of Auramazda 
 my army smote that rebellious army utterly; on the 
 9th day of the month, Thaigarcis then it was thus the 
 battle (was) fought by them; afterwards Dadarsis 
 awaited me until I came to Media. 
 
 10. Says Darius the king afterwards Vaumisa by 
 name, a Persian, my subject, him I sent forth to Ar- 
 menia; thus I said to him; go, the rebellious army 
 which does not call itself mine, smite it; afterwards 
 Vaumisa went away; when he came to Armenia 
 afterwards, the rebellious ones having come together 
 went against Vaumisa to engage in battle; there (is) 
 
 a region, by name, in Assyria — here they 
 
 engaged in battle; Auramazda bore me aid; by the 
 aid of Auramazda my army smote that rebellious 
 army utterly; on the 15th day of the month Ana- 
 maka, then it was thus the battle (was) fought by 
 them. 
 
 1 1. Says Darius the king a second time the rebel- 
 lious ones having come together went against Vaumisa 
 to engage in battle; there (is) a region Autiyara by 
 name in Armenia — here they engaged in battle; 
 Auramazda bore me aid; by the grace of Auramazda 
 
 ihy army smote that rebellious army utterly; 
 
 of the month Thuravahara thus the battle 
 
126 
 
 (was) fought by them; afterwards Vaumisa awaited me 
 in Armenia until I came to Media. 
 
 12. Says Darius the king afterwards I went from 
 Babylon; I went away to Media; when I went to 
 Media — there (is) a town Kudurus by name in Media 
 — here this Fravartis (i. e., Phaortes) who called him- 
 self king in Media went with (his) army against me to 
 engage in battle; afterwards we engaged in battle; 
 Auramazda bore me aid; by the grace of Auramazda 
 I smote the army of Fravartis utterly; on the 26th 
 day of the month Adukanis then it was we engaged 
 in battle. 
 
 I J. Says Darius the king afterwards this Fravartis 
 with faithful ? horsemen — in that place (was) a region 
 Raga by name in Media — here went; afterwards I 
 sent forth my army against them; Fravartis was seized 
 (and) led to me; I cut off (his) nose and ears and 
 
 tongue, and to him I led; he was held 
 
 bound at my court; the whole state saw him; after- 
 wards I put (him) on a cross at Ecbatana, and what 
 men were his foremost allies, these I threw within a 
 prison at Ecbatana. 
 
 14. Says Darius the king one man, Citra(n)takhma 
 by name, a Sagartian, he became rebellious to me; 
 thus he said to the state; I am king in Sagartia, of 
 the family of Uvakhshatara; afterwards I sent forth 
 the Persian and Median army; Takhmaspada by name, 
 a Mede, my subject, him I made chief of them; thus 
 I said to them; go, the rebellious army, which does 
 not call itself mine, smite it; afterwards Takhmaspada 
 went away with the army (and) engaged in battle 
 with Citra(n)takhma; Auramazda bore me aid; by the 
 grace of Auramazda my army smote that rebellious 
 army utterly and seized Citra(n)takhma (and) brought 
 (him) to me; afterwards I cut off his nose and ears, 
 .and to him I led; he was held bound at mv 
 
12/ 
 
 •court; the whole state saw him; afterwards I put him 
 on a cross in Arabia, 
 
 15. Says Darius the king this (is) what (was) done 
 by me in Media. 
 
 16. Says Darius the king Parthia and Hyrcania 
 
 of Fravartis called himself; 
 
 Hystaspes my father army after- 
 wards Hystaspes . . . allies town ... by name 
 
 they engaged in battle thus 
 
 the battle (was) fought by them. 
 
128 
 
 III. 
 
 1. Says Darius the king afterwards I sent forth the 
 Persian army to Hystaspes from Raga; when this 
 army came to Hystaspes, afterwards Hystaspes with 
 that army went away — there (is) a town Patigrabana 
 by name in Parthia — here he engaged in battle with 
 the rebellious ones; Auramazda bore me aid; by the 
 grace of Auramazda Hystaspes smote that rebellious 
 army utterly; on the first day of the month Garmapada 
 then it was that thus the battle (was) fought by them. 
 
 2. Says Darius the king afterwards it became my 
 province; this (is) what (was) done by me in Parthia. 
 
 3. Says Darius the king there (is) a region Margus 
 by name; it became rebellious to me; one man Frada, 
 a Margianian, him they made chief; afterwards I sent 
 forth Dadarsis by name, a Persian, my subject, satrap 
 in Bactria against him; thus I said to him: go, smite 
 that army which does not call itself mine; afterwards 
 Dadarsis with the army went away (and) engaged in 
 battle with the Margianians; Auramazda bore me aid; 
 by the grace of Auramazda my army smote that re- 
 bellious army utterly; on the 23rd day of the month 
 Atriyadiya then it was thus the battle (was) fought 
 by them. 
 
 4. Says Darius the king afterwards it became my 
 province; this (is) what (was) done by me in Bactria. 
 
 5. Says Darius the king one man Vahyazdata by 
 name — there (is) a town Tarava by name; there (is) a 
 region Yutiya by name in Persia — here halted; he a 
 second time (i. e. , after Gaumata) rose up in Persia: 
 thus he said to the state; I am Bardiya the son of 
 Cyrus; afterwards the Persian army which (was) in 
 clans departed from duty; it became estranged from 
 me (and) went over to that Vahyazdata; he became 
 king in Persia. 
 
 6. Says Darius the king afterwards I sent forth the 
 
129 
 
 Persian and Median army which was by me; Artavar- 
 diya by name, a Persian, my subject, him I made 
 chief of them; the other Persian army went with (lit. 
 after) me to Media; afterwards Artavardiya with the 
 army went to Persia; when he came to Persia — there 
 (is) a town Rakha by name in Persia — here this 
 Vahyazdata who called himself Bardiya went with 
 (his) army against Artavardiya to engage in battle; 
 afterwards they engaged in battle; Auramazda bore 
 me aid; by the grace of Auramazda my army smote 
 that army of Vahyazdata utterly; on the 1 2th day of 
 the month Xhuravahara then it was thus the battle 
 (was) fought by them. 
 
 7. Says Darius the king afterwards this Vahyazdata 
 with faithful.? horsemen then went to Paishiyauvada; 
 from thence he went with an army again against Arta- 
 vardiya to engage in battle; there (is) a mountain 
 Paraga by name — here they engaged in battle; Aura- 
 mazda gave me aid; by the grace of Auramazda my 
 army smote that army of Vahyazdata utterly; on the 
 6th day of the month Garmapada then it was thus the 
 battle (was) fought by them and they seized that 
 Vahyazdata and what men were his foremost allies, 
 they seized. 
 
 8. Says Darius the king afterwards — there (is) a 
 a town is Persia Uvadaidaya by name* — here, that 
 Vahyazdata and what men were his foremost allies, 
 them I put on a cross. 
 
 9. Says Darius the king this Vahyazdata who called 
 himself Bardiya he sent forth an army to Harauvatia 
 — there (was) Vivana by name, a Persian, my subject, 
 satrap in Harauvatis — against him (he sent an army) 
 
 ♦The reader has noticed the constant use of paratax. Instead of 
 bringing the words of the sentence into syntax independent construc- 
 tions are employed. In no other language is this loose arrangtment 
 (which we must feel was original to speech) shown to better advantage 
 than in the old Persian inscriptions. Cf. Grammar, 59, 
 
I30 
 
 and one man he made chief of them; thus he said to 
 them: go, smite that Vivana and that army which 
 calls itself of Darius the king, afterwards this army, 
 which Vahyazadata sent forth, went against Vivana, 
 to engage in battle; there is a stronghold Kapisha- 
 kanis by name — here they engaged in battle; Aura- 
 mazda bore me aid; by the grace of Auramazda my 
 army smote that rebellious army utterly; on the 13th 
 day of the month Anamaka then it was thus the battle 
 (was) fought by them. 
 
 10. Says Darius the king again the rebellious ones 
 having come together went against Vivana to engage 
 in battle; there (is) a region Ga(n)dutava by name — 
 here they engaged in battle; Auramazda bore me 
 aid; by the grace of Auramazda my army smote that 
 rebellious army utterly; on the 8th day of the month 
 Viyakhna then it was thus the battle (was) fought by 
 them. 
 
 11. Says Darius the king afterwards this man, who 
 was chief of that army which Vahyazdata sent against 
 Vivana, this chief with faithful ? horseman went away 
 — there (is) a stronghold Arshada by name in Harau- 
 vatis — he went beyond thence; afterwards Vivana, with 
 an army on foot went (against) them; here he seized 
 him and what men were his foremost allies he slew. 
 
 12. Says Darius the king afterwards the province 
 became mine; this is what was done by me at Harau- 
 vatis. 
 
 13. Says Darius the king when I was in Persia and 
 Media a second time the Babylonians became es- 
 tranged from me; one man, Arakha by name, an 
 Armenian son of Han(i*)dita,* he rose up in Babylon; 
 
 ♦The N in Handita as well as the N in Dubana conjecture has sup- 
 plied. The combination of wedges in the cuneiform text resembles no 
 other characters on the stone and perhaps is the sign for L which 
 otherwise would be wanting in the Old Persian alphabet. I, however, 
 feel that it is simply a careless writing of the nasal. 
 
131 
 
 there (is) a region, Duban(?)aby name — from there he 
 rose up; thus he lied; I am Nabukudracara, the son of 
 Nabunita; afterwards the Babylonian state became es- 
 tranged from me (and) went over to that Arakha; he 
 seized Babylon; he became king in Babylon. 
 
 14. Says Darius the king afterwards I sent forth my 
 army to Babylon; Vi(n)dafra by name, a Mede, my 
 subject, him I made chief; thus I said to them; go, 
 smite that army in Babylon which does not call itself 
 mine; afterwards Vi(n)dafra with an army went to 
 Babylon; Auramazda bore me aid; by the grace of 
 
 Auramazda, Vi(n)dafra seized Babylon 
 
 on the 2d day of the month then it was thus. . . 
 
132 
 
 IV. 
 
 1. Says Darius the king this (is) what was done by 
 me in Babylon. 
 
 2. Says Darius the king this (is) what I did; by the 
 grace of Auramazda it was (done) wholly in (my) 
 way;"^ after that the kings became rebellious I engaged 
 in XIX battles; by the grace of Auramazda I smote 
 themt and I seized IX kings; there was one, Gaumata 
 by name, a Magian; he lied; thus he said; I am Bardiya 
 the son of Cyrus; he made Persia rebellious; there 
 (was) one, Atrina by name, in Uvaja; he lied; thus 
 he said; I am king in Uvaja; he made Uvaja rebellious 
 to me; there (was) one, Naditabira by name, a Baby- 
 lonian; he lied; thus he said; I am Nabukudracara the 
 son of Nabunita; he made Babylon rebellious; there 
 (was) one, Martiya by name, a Persian; he lied; thus 
 he said; I am Imanis king in Uvaja; he made Uvaja 
 rebellious; there (was) one Fravartis byname, a Mede; 
 he lied; thus he said; I am Khshathrita of the family 
 of Uvakhshatara; he made Media rebellious; there 
 (was) one, Citra(n)takhma by name, in Sagartia; he 
 lied; thus he said; I am King in Sagartia, of the fam- 
 ily of Uvakhshatara; he made Sagartia rebellious; there 
 (was) one, Frada by name, a Margianian; he lied; thus 
 he said; I am a king in Margus, he made Margus re- 
 bellious; there (was) one, Vahyazdata by name, a 
 Persian; he lied; thus he said; I am Bardiya the son 
 of Cyrus; he made Persia rebellious; there (was) one, 
 Arakha by name, an Armenian; he lied; thus he said; 
 I am Nabukudracara the son of Nabunita; he made 
 Babylon rebellious. 
 
 *HAMAHYAYA TH«RDa is of doubtful intetpetation. Rawl suggested 
 • 'the performance of the whole"; Oppert "dans toute ma vie; dans 
 toute I'annie, toujours"; Spiegel "in aller Weiser." Many attempts 
 have been made to connect tharda with the Sanskrit 9arad, autumn 
 used in the Veda metaphorically for year. Cf . Grammar, 80, c. 
 
 I Or smote theirs^ i. e., their forces. Cf. Grammar, 83, b. 
 
133 
 
 3- Says Darius the king these IX kings I seized 
 within these battles. 
 
 4. Says Darius the king these (are) the provinces 
 which became rebellious; a lie made them* .... that 
 these deceived the state; afterwards Auramazda made 
 them in my hand; as desire (moved) me, thus 
 
 5. Says Darius the king O thou who wilt be king in 
 the future, protect thyself strongly from deceit; what- 
 ever man will be a deceiver, him punish well (lit. him 
 well punished punish. Cf. , 1. 8), if thus thou shalt 
 think **may my country be firm." 
 
 6. Says Darius the king this (is) what I did; by the 
 grace of Auramazda I did (it) wholly in (my) way;t 
 O thou who shalt examine this inscription in the 
 future, let it convince thee (as to) what (was) done by 
 me; do not deceive thyself. 
 
 7. Says Darius the king Auramazda (is) a witness.? 
 that this (is) true (and) not false (which) I did wholly 
 in my way.| 
 
 8. Says Darius the king by the grace of Auramazda 
 
 (what) else (was) done by me to a 
 
 great extent, that (is) not inscribed on this inscription; 
 for this reason it (is) not inscribed lest whoever will 
 
 examine this inscription in the future 
 
 it may not convince him (as to) what (was) done by 
 me (and) he may think (it) false. § 
 
 9. Says Darius the king who were the former kings, 
 by these nothing (was) done to a great extent as (was) 
 
 *Perhaps we can supply with Spiegel hamitriya a He made them 
 rebellious. 
 
 fCf. IV. 2. 
 
 XQi. IV. 2. 
 
 §Although much has become obliterated yet we have enough to 
 enable us to gain the sense of the passage. The idea is: should I 
 write the memorial of all my achievements, they would be so many 
 that men would lose faith in the testimony of this stone. 
 
134 
 
 performed* wholly by me through the grace of Aura- 
 mazda. 
 
 10. Says Darius the king let it convince 
 
 thee (as to) what (was) done by me; thus 
 
 for this reason do not hide (this monument); if thou 
 shalt not hide this monument (but) tell (it) to the state, 
 may Auramazda be a friend to thee and may there be 
 to thee a family abundantly and live thou long. 
 
 11. Says Darius the king if thou shalt hide this mon- 
 ument (and) not tell (it) to the state, may Auramazda 
 be a smiter to thee and may there not be to thee a 
 family. 
 
 12. Says Darius the king this (is) what I did wholly 
 in (my) way;t by the grace of Auramazda I did (it); 
 Auramazda bore me aid and the other gods which are. 
 
 13. Says Darius the king for this reason Auramazda 
 bore me aid and the other gods which are, because I 
 was not an enemy, I was not a deceiver, I was not a 
 
 despot family above law, above me 
 
 I did that whoever for me 
 
 helped those belonging to my race, him well supported 
 I supported; whenever. . . '. him well pun- 
 ished I punished. 
 
 14. Says Darius the king O thou who art king in 
 
 the future, whatever man shall be a deceiver 
 
 shall be (be) not a friend to these; punish 
 
 these with severe punishment. 
 
 15. Says Darius the king O thou who shalt see this 
 inscription in the future which I inscribed or these 
 pictures, thou shalt not destroy (them) J as long as 
 thou shalt live; thus guard them. 
 
 *Cf. IV. 2, but here THaRDa fails to appear. 
 
 fCf. IV. 2. 
 
 JOld Persian yava. ..Fflr das auffallige — a scheinen mir und zwei 
 mOglichkeiten offen: es konnte yava nach abfall des t als flectierbarer 
 a-stamm vom sprachgeftihl aufgefasst an das femininum t^uma sich 
 formell anschliessen (mit einbusse der conjunctionalen bedeutung), 
 
135 
 
 l6. Says Darius the king if thou shalt see this in- 
 scription or these pictures (and) shalt not destroy 
 them and shalt guard them for me as long as (thy) 
 family shall be, may Auramazda be a friend to thee 
 and may there be to thee a family abundantly and live 
 thou long and whatever thou shalt do, this for thee 
 (let) Auramazda let him grant thy prayers. 
 
 19. Says Darius the king if thou shalt see this 
 inscription or these pictures (and) shalt destroy them 
 and shalt not guard them for me as long as (thy) fam- 
 ily shall be, may Auramazda be a smiter to thee and 
 may there not be to thee a family and whatever thou 
 shalt do this let Auramazda destroy for thee. 
 
 18. Says Darius the king these (are) the men who 
 were there then when I slew Gaumata the Magian who 
 called himself Bardiya; then these men co-operated as 
 my allies; Vi(n)dafranaby name, the son of Vayaspara, 
 a Persian; Utana by name, the son of Thukhra, a Per- 
 sian; Gaubaruva by name, the son of Marduniya, a 
 Persian; Vidarna by name, the son of Magabigna, a 
 Persian; Bagabukhsha by name, the son of Daduhya, 
 a Persian; Ardumanis by name, the son of Vahauka, 
 a Persian. 
 
 19. Says Darius the king O thou who art king in the 
 future, what what Darius 
 
 I did. 
 
 Oder es hat nach analogic von yfl-tha, yata {,,bis, warend")und andern 
 auf -a ausleutenden conjunctionen selbst langen auslaut erhalten. 
 
 Wenn allerdings Bh. IV, 71 yava ji[vahy ] zu lesen ist, so bleibt 
 die zweite erklarung allein iibrig. Die gegenseitige beeinflussung von 
 partikeln bietet nichts auilallendes: es kann avSV? (Brugmann Griech. 
 Gramm. §200) neben avev, ngr. avtU neben avtiy Torffneben 
 tore u. a. nach analogic von yUfjpi-^ etc., sowieiiberhauptdasum- 
 Bichgreifen des auslautenden -s in griech. partikeln {OVtOD-<sy 00? y 
 etc.) verglichen werden." (A. T.) 
 
 J. Schmidt explains yava as neuter plural (172). 
 
136 
 
 V. 
 
 I. Says Darius the king this (is) what I did 
 
 way 
 
 king province; this became 
 
 estranged from me; one man ..imina by name; the 
 (people) of Uvaja made him chief; afterwards I sent 
 forth (my) army to Uvaja; one man Gaubaruva by 
 name, a Persian, my subject, him I made chief of 
 them; afterwards this Gaubaruva with an army went 
 to Uvaja; he engaged in battle with the rebellious 
 
 ones; afterwards 
 
 and to him 
 
 he seized and led to 
 
 me provmce 
 
 thus it 
 
 2. Says Darius the king 
 
 Auramazda by the grace of 
 
 Auramazda I did. 
 
 3. Says Darius the king whoever in the future .... 
 
 4. Says Darius the King I 
 
 went against Saka 
 
 Tigris to the sea 
 
 I seized the enemy to 
 
 Saku(n)ka by name, him I seized 
 
 there another as chief 
 
 afterwards 
 
 5. Says Darius the king not 
 
 Auramazda if by the grace of Auramazda 
 
 I did. 
 
137 
 
 6. Says Darius the king worship? Auramazda 
 
 Kossowicz remarks: "Notatu dignum, omnium, quantum scio, im- 
 peratorum, qui armorum vi atque gloria celebres extiterant, nisi 
 duo, Darium Hystaspi nerape et Napoleonem I — mum, commilitonum 
 nomina; victorias suas recensendo, in publicis monumentis memoriae 
 tradidisse. ' * 
 
138 
 
 The Smaller Inscriptions of Behistan. 
 a. 
 
 OVER THE PICTURE OF DARIUS.* 
 
 I (am) Darius, the great king, king of kings, king of 
 Persia, king of the countries, the son of Hystaspes, the 
 grandson of Arshama, the Achaemenide. Says Darius 
 the king my father (is) Hystaspes, the father of Hystas- 
 pes (is) Arshama, the father of Arshama (is) Ariyaram- 
 na, the father of Ariyaramna (is) Caispis, the father of 
 Caispis (is) Achaemenes. Says Darius the king there- 
 fore we are called Achaemenides; from long ago we 
 have extended; from long ago our family have been 
 kings. Says Darius the king VUI of my family (there 
 were) who were formerly kings; I am the ninth IX; in- 
 dividually we are kings. 
 
 UNDER THE PROSTRATE FORM. 
 
 This Gaumata the Median lied; thus he said; I am 
 Bardiya, the son of Cyrus; I am king. 
 
 c. 
 
 OVER THE FIRST STANDING FIGURE. 
 
 This Atrina lied; thus he said; I am king in Uvaja. 
 
 d. 
 
 OVER THE SECOND STANDING FIGURE. 
 
 This Naditabiralied; thus he said; I am Nabuk(u)- 
 dracara, the son of Nabunita; I am king in Babylon. 
 
 e. 
 
 UPON THE GARMENT OF THE THIRD STANDING FIGURE. 
 
 This Fravartis lied; thus he said; I am Khshathrita 
 of the family of Uvakhshatara; I am king in Media. 
 
 ♦Cf. I. 1-4. 
 
139 
 f. 
 
 OVER THE FOURTH STANDING FIGURE. 
 
 This Martiya lied; thus he said; I am Imanis, king- 
 in Uvaja. 
 
 OVER THE FIFTH STANDING FIGURE, 
 
 This Citra(n)takhma lied; thus he said; I am king 
 in Sagartia, of the family of Uvakhshatara. 
 
 h. 
 
 OVER THB SIXTH STANDING FIGURB. 
 
 This Vahyazdata lied; thus he said; I am Bardiya, 
 the son of Cyrus; I am king. 
 ♦. 
 
 !. 
 
 OVER THB SEVENTH STANDING FIGURB. 
 
 This Arakha lied; thus he said; I am Nabuk(u)dra- 
 cara, the son of Nabunita; I am king in, Babylon. 
 
 J. 
 
 OVER THE EIGHTH STANDING FIGURE. 
 
 This Frada lied; thus he said; I am king in Margus. 
 
 k. 
 
 OVER THE NINTH STANDING FIGURE.* 
 
 This (is) Saku(n)ka, the Sakian. 
 
 *Herodotus mentions the high cap which was peculiar to the garb 
 of the Sakians. It is interesting to note that the figure lis represented 
 on the stone wearing this national head-dress. 
 
I40 
 
 The Inscription of Alvend. (O.) 
 
 (PERSIAN.) 
 
 This inscription is engraven upon two niches on a 
 large block of stone near the base of Mt. Alvend. Not 
 only is the monumental fame of Darius perpetuated 
 by the Behistan mountain, but in different parts of the 
 Persian empire this monarch caused to be inscribed 
 historic records of his reign. At Persepolis the pal- 
 aces declare the name of their founder and his prayers 
 for the protection of heaven. To Darius beyond all 
 others we are indebted for what we have of the Paleo- 
 graphy of Persia. 
 
 I TRANSLATION. 
 
 A great God (is) Auramazda who created this earth, 
 who created yonder heaven,* who created man, who 
 created thet spirit? of man, who made Darius king, 
 one king of many, one lord of many. I (am) Darius 
 the great king, king of kings, king of the countries 
 possessing many kinds of people, king of this great 
 earth far and wide, the son of Hystaspes, the Achae- 
 menide. 
 
 *AsMAN {heaven) is literally a stone as we know from its cognate in 
 Sanskrit. Probably the Persians regarded the sky as a solid dome; 
 cf. the Hebrew word raqi(a) (Gen. I, 8.) and our firmament (firma- 
 mentum). 
 
 f The old Persian shiyatis is the Avest. shaiti. The Assyrian trans- 
 lates the word by dumqu ' 'blessing. ' ' But cf . Fick, idg. Wb. I' 233, 
 and J. Schmidt Plur. d. idg. Ntr. 418. 
 
141 
 The Inscriptions of Suez. (SZ.) 
 
 (PERSIAN, MEDIAN, ASSYRIAN, EGYPTIAN.) 
 
 A crowned head is carved upon the stone together 
 with the following legend: 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 A. 
 
 Darius the great king; king of kings, king of the 
 countries, the son of Hystaspes, the Achaemenide. 
 
 Above are a dozen lines of Persian cuneiform text 
 the translation of which follows: 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 B. 
 
 A great god (is) Auramazda, who created yonder 
 heaven, who created this earth, who created man, 
 who created the spirit*? of man, who made Darius 
 king, who gave the kingdom to Darius; what great 
 
 I (am) Darius the great king, king of kings, king of the 
 countries possessing many people, king of this great 
 earth far and wide, son of Hystaspes, the Achaemen- 
 ide. Says Darius the king I am a Persian; with (the 
 help of) Persia I seized Egypt; I commanded to dig 
 this canal, t from the Nile by name a river which flows 
 in Egypt, to the sea which goes from Persia; after- 
 wards this canal was dug there as I commanded .... 
 
 »Cf. note under (O). 
 tCf. Herodotus, IV. 39. 
 
142 
 
 The Inscription of London, 
 
 (PERSIAN, MEDIAN, ASSYRIAN.) 
 
 The following short inscription can be seen in the 
 British Museum on a cylinder which furnishes a fine 
 specimen of gem engraving. A warrior in his chariot 
 is represented as attacking at full speed a lion,* the 
 symbol of power. This warrior from his crown we 
 can interpret as King Darius. ,He holds his bow 
 ready for action, while the charioteer urges on the 
 steeds. This cylinder was carried to England from 
 Egypt. 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 I (am) Darius the king. 
 
 *On the Persian sculptures, the lion and bull occur often, as em- 
 blems of strength. Metaphors of this kind are frequent in all oriental 
 literature. In making a list of the epithets of the god Indra in the 
 Veda, one is struck with the repeated comparisons of this sort. How- 
 ever, the Vedic poets drew from the stall as the most fertile source of 
 metaphors, and it was the later Sanskrit which used the beasts of the 
 forest more extensively for that purpose, (e. g. , the tiger of men, etc. ) 
 In Biblical literature the reader is referred to Ezekiel i. lo. "As for 
 the likeness of their faces, they four had the faces of man, and the 
 face of a lion on the right side.'* Daniel vii. 4. "The first was like 
 a lion and had eagles' wings." The familiar national emblems of 
 later date, the Roman eagle, the British lion, etc., all had their origin 
 in this early conception. 
 
«F run 
 
 UNIVERSIT 
 
 143 ^N..£^H£0^^ 
 
 The Inscriptions of Darius at Persepolis. 
 
 (PERSIAN, [median, ASSYRIAN.]) 
 
 The inscriptions of Persepolis show that same spirit 
 of patriotism which characterizes the record on Mt. 
 Behistan. The superiority of Persia over the pro- 
 vinces of the empire is set forth by the monarch with 
 the purpose of elevating the feelings of his country- 
 men and of keeping alive ever in their hearts the 
 love of country. The palace of Darius shows the 
 ruins of several departments with external chambers 
 which were evidently guard-rooms. The roof of a 
 large room, fifty feet square, was supported by pillars, 
 the bases of which remain to-day. This edifice is 
 one of those ruins which represent the combined work 
 of several successive Achaemenian kings. All the 
 structures stand upon the same platform around which 
 are great walls of hewn stone. Two inscriptions are 
 found above the wall and one on two pillars, which 
 read as follows: 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 H. 
 
 ABOVE THE WALL SURROUNDING THE PALACE. 
 
 The great Auramazda, who (is) the greatest of the 
 gods, he made Darius king; he gave to him the king- 
 dom; by the grace of Auramazda Darius (is) king. 
 Says Darius the king this (is) the country Persia 
 which Auramazda gave me, which, beautiful, posses- 
 sing good horses, possessing good men, by the grace 
 of Auramazda and (by the achievements) of me 
 Darius the king, does not fear an* enemy. (.?) Says 
 Darius the king let Auramazda bear me aid with (his) 
 fellow gods and let Auramazda protect this country 
 from an army, from misfortune, from deceit; may not 
 an enemy .... come unto this country, nor an army, 
 
 *0r, THE Other (i. e., Ahriman). Cf. note to (I). 
 
144 
 
 nor misfortune nor deceit; this I pray of Auramazda 
 .... with (his) fellow gods; this let Auramazda give 
 me with (his) fellow gods. 
 
 ANOTHER INSCRIPTION ABOVE THB WALL. 
 
 I (am) Darius the great king, king of kings, king 
 of many countries, the son of Hystaspes, the Achae- 
 menide. Says Darius the king by the grace of 
 Auramazda these (are) the provinces which I subdued 
 with (the help of) that Persian army, (and) which 
 feared me (and) brought to me tribute; Uvaja, Media, 
 Babylon, Arabia, Assyria, Egypt, Armenia, Cap- 
 padocia, Sparda, Ionia, which (are) of the dry (land) 
 (and) which (are) of the sea, and the provinces which 
 (are) in the east, Sagartia, Parthia, Zara(n)ka, Har- 
 aiva, Bactria, Sugda, Uvarazamiya, Thatagus, Harau- 
 vatis, India, Ga(n)dara, Saka, Maka. Says Darius 
 the king if thus thou shalt think **may I not fear an 
 enemy,"* protect this Persian state; if the Persian 
 state shall be protected, may this goddess (namely) 
 this spirit (of patriotism) for a long time unharmed^ 
 descend upon this race. 
 
 B. 
 
 OVER THE PILLARS IN THE PALACE. 
 
 Darius the great king, king of kings, king of the 
 countries, the son of Hystapes, the Achaemenide, 
 who built this palace. ' 
 
 * Dr. Julius Oppert understood the Old Persian word ANiYd: (other) 
 to be the only notion of ah rim an found in the inscriptions. He ar- 
 gued that the word ANiYa never means "enemy:" The prayer he 
 translated ' ' The good Principle, which has always destroyed the 
 Hater (DUvaisaTaM) will descend on this house." 
 
145 
 The Inscription on the Tomb of Darius. (NR.) 
 
 (PERSIAN, MEDIAN, ASSYRIAN.) 
 
 Naqshi — Rustam is the burial place of Darius. 
 
 On the face of a mountain which rises to the per- 
 pendicular height of 900 feet are cut the excavations 
 which are doubtless tombs. These relics have a com- 
 mon external appearance. They are carved into the 
 rock fourteen feet deep in the form of a cross, the 
 upright section of which is about ninety feet, the 
 transverse division about fifty feet. Four pilasters 
 about seven feet apart ornament the transverse sec- 
 tion, in the midst of which is the door of the tomb. 
 On the division above the fa9ade of this sepulchre 
 are the sculptures. A double row of fourteen figures 
 supports two cornices. Two bulls form the pillars at 
 each end of the upper cornice. On an elevated ped- 
 estal of three steps stands a figure dressed in a flow- 
 ing robe, holding his bow in his left hand. Without 
 doubt this is the effigy of him who lies buried be- 
 neath. Opposite the standing form, on a pedestal 
 of three steps, is an altar, upon which the sacred fire 
 is burning, while above is a disk, probably represent- 
 ing the sun, of which the fire blazing at the shrine is 
 the symbol. Above is the image of Auramazda. One 
 of these structures Ker-Porter visited, and with great 
 difficulty explored its interior. Although he was not 
 able to read the inscription, yet he conjectured that 
 this was the tomb of Darius. I quote him at this 
 point. **The second tomb is the only one whereon 
 the m.arks of an inscription can be traced; but over 
 the whole tablet of the upper compartment letters 
 are visible wherever they could be introduced; above 
 the figures, between them and the altar, along the 
 side, from top to bottom; in short, everywhere we see 
 it covered with the arrow-headed characters and in 
 good preservation. What a treasure of information 
 
146 
 
 doubtless is there to the happy man who can de- 
 cipher it. It was tantalizing to a painful degree to 
 look at such a sealed book in the very spot of mys- 
 tery, where probably its contents would explain all. 
 But it certainly is a very distinguishing peculiarity 
 of this tomb that it alone should contain any inscrip- 
 tion, and that the writing on it is so abundant; a cir- 
 cumstance that might warrant the supposition of this 
 being the tomb that was cut by the express orders of 
 Darius Hystaspes to receive his remains." (Travels 
 in Georgia, Persia, Armenia, ancient Babylonia, etc., 
 etc., by Sir Robert Ker-Porter, vol. I, p. 523.) 
 
 Before translating the inscription I wish to call the 
 attention of the reader to Herod. Ill, 88. 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 A great god is Auramazda, who created this earth, 
 who created yonder heaven, who created man, who 
 created the spirit* of man, who made Darius king, 
 one king of many, one lord of many. I (am) Darius the 
 great king, king of kings, king of the countries possess- 
 ing many kinds of people, king of this great earth far 
 and wide, son of Hystaspes the Achaemenide, a Per- 
 sian, the son of a Persian: an Aryan, an Aryan off- 
 spring. Says Darius the king by the grace of Aura- 
 mazda these (are) the provinces which I seized afarf 
 from Persia; I ruled them; they brought tribute to me 
 
 what was commanded to them by 
 
 me, this they did; the law which (is) mine that was 
 established; Media, Uvaja, Parthia, Haraiva, Bactria, 
 Suguda, Uvarazamis, Zara(n)ka Harauvatis, Thatagus, 
 Ga(n)dara, India, Sakae, Humavarkae, Sakae Tigrak- 
 haudae, Babylon, Assyria, Arabia, Egypt, Armenia, 
 
 *Cf. note to (O). 
 f Or, EXCEPT Persia. 
 
147 
 
 Cappadocia, Sparda, Ionia, Sakae]beyond the sea, the 
 lonians wearing long hair* Patians Kusians, Macians, 
 Karkians. Says Darius the king Auramazda when he 
 
 saw this earth afterwards gave 
 
 it to me; he made me king; I am king; by the grace 
 of Auramazda I established it on (its) foundation; 
 what I commanded to them, this they did as desire 
 came to (lit. was) me. If perchance thou shalt think 
 that manifold (lit. a manifold thing) are these provinces 
 which Darius the king held, look at the picture (of 
 those) who are bearing my throne, t in order that 
 thou mayest know them; then to thee will be the 
 knowledge (that) the spear of a Persian man hath 
 gone forth afar; then to thee will be the knowledge 
 (that) a Persian man waged battle far from Persia. 
 Says Darius the king this (is) what (was) done; all 
 this by the grace of Auramazda I did; Auramazda 
 bore me aid until this was done, let Auramazda pro- 
 tect me from and my race and this 
 
 country; this I pray of Auramazda; this let Auramazda 
 give me. O man, what (are) the commands of Aura- 
 mazda, may he (make them) revealed to thee; do not 
 err; do not leave the right path, do not sin.ij: 
 
 *Cf. the Homeric KaptjKOJ^GJOvreS. 
 
 fThe northern throne of the great palace contains five tiers of ten 
 warriors supporting the platform on which the king is represented sit- 
 ting, surrounded by his attendants. 
 
 JCf. Bartholomae Bezz. Beitr. X. 269, and Kern (ZDMG. XXIII, 
 222). For meaning of. ma STaRaya, cf . Melanges, Asiat. Ill, 344. 
 Thumb (Zeitschrift fiir vgl. Sprachforsch, 1891) translates ,,0 
 mensch! lass dir die lehre des Auramazda gesagt sein. Verabscheue 
 sie iiicht den richtigen weg (d. h, die lehre des A.), beflecke ihn 
 nicht. " I quote an extract, 
 
 "Zunachst halte ich dieerklarung von gaista: als,,stinkend — wider- 
 wSrtig" wegen der raerkwurdigen bedeutungsiibertragung insethische 
 fiir unwahrscheinlich und ziehedie von selbst sich aufdrangende zuge- 
 horigkeit zu ai. gad ,,sagen, sprechen" vor. Kern hat dies schon 
 langst gesehen und in dem worte das part, auf -ta erkannt; aber bei 
 einem transitiven verbum durch die annahme medialer bedeutung 
 
148 
 
 B. 
 
 A great god (is) Auramazda who 
 
 made spirit ? of man 
 
 above Darius the king 
 
 Says Darius the king 
 
 by the grace of Auramazda 
 
 ... .is violence 
 violence 
 
 jenes verbaladjectivs den activen sinn ,,(er) hat gesagt" herauszu- 
 bringen, ist nicht weniger gezwungen. g^?sta ist regelmassiges passives 
 particip und muss mit hya zusammenconstruiert werden, welches ich 
 als optativ der copula (*siet) fasse. Es istdaher zu iibersetzen: ,,m6ge 
 dir gesagt sein die lehre des Auramazda," ,,lass dir gasagt sein, " 
 d. h. ,,halte fest an- ... ". Einen optativ hat in hya schon Bopp 
 (Lautsystem d. apers. p. 149) vermutet, wenn auch seine weitere 
 erklarung eine ganz andere, verfehlte ist. Wir gewinnen durch die 
 von uns vorgeschlagene constructionsweise eine genaue parallele zu J. 
 22 f. hya duv^/istrt'm shiyatis akhsata: in beiden fallen ist hya von dem 
 nachfolgenden passiven particip getrennt und das subject in die mitte 
 genommen; nurder gebrauch des optativs ist verschieden. An unserer 
 stelle bezeichnet er den einer aufforderung fast gleichkommenden 
 wunsch. 
 
 Eine gewisse wahrscheinlichkeit, dass hya das pronomen hy^; nicht 
 sein kann, sehe ich in dem umstand, dass mit ausnahme des einen 
 hya amakh(7m t.7uma (in gleicher v^^iederholung Bh. I 8 und A 12) die 
 verbindung hy^ + genetiv+ substantiv durchaus ungewQnlich ist. (Ein 
 solches hya (oder tya) is dagagen beliebt zv^^ischen subst. und nachfol- 
 genden gen. Bh. I, 85. 89. 95. II, 69. Ill, 38 Bh. I, 69. 71. II, 
 27- 35-40. 46. 55.) 
 
 Die positiv ausgedriickte aufforderung wird mit den folgenden in- 
 junctiven nochmals in negativer form wiederholt. Die alte erklarung 
 von ma thadaya ist nun natiirlich unmoglich gewordeu; es ist die 2. 
 pers sing, des injunctivs wie die folgenden formen auch. Ich ziehe 
 th'd zur ai. wurzel ^ad. ,,abfallen" und sehe dieselbe wurzel im ger- 
 man, hatjan ,,hassen", fiir das man meines wissens noch keine an- 
 knupfung in den vervvandten sprachen gefunden hat (s. Kluge, Etym. 
 Wb. s. v.). Die bedeutungsentwicklung ist,, abf alien, verwerfen, ver 
 abscheuen, hassen ' ' An imserer stelle haben wir die wahl zu tiber- 
 setzen ,,falle nicht ab" oder , , verabscheue nicht". Im letzern fall© 
 bildet ap. thad den tibergang in der bedeutungsentwicklung von ai. 
 pcd zu german. hassen. Die zweite bedeutung ..verabscheuen" darf 
 auf grand des durch die medische tibersetzung festge&tellten sinns 
 
SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE TO NRa. 
 
 As this volume goes to press an article (published 
 in 1893) comes from the pen of the distinguished 
 scholar Hiibschmann. He insists on "iibel" as the 
 signification of Ga^^Ta (NRa) against Thumb's argu- 
 ment (published in 1891) which I have quoted at some 
 length on p. 147. I add a few extracts. 
 
 " Auf diese erklarung Kern's greift nun A. Thumb 
 zuriick, ohne die griinde, die fiir Spiegel's deutung 
 sprechen, zu erwagen. Diese griinde aber sind durch- 
 aus stichhaltig und werfen Thumb's erklarung um. 
 GaS>Ta ist in der keilschrift 2. gattung durch ein wort 
 
 iibersetzt, das fruher siyiuiika, von Oppert 
 
 visnika, von Weisbach niiisJuiika gelesen wird, 
 
 dessen bedeutung aber nicht zweifelhaft ist 
 
 und sein aequivalent im Babylonischen text ist bi-i-shi, 
 das ,,bose" bedeutet."^ 
 
 Wie mit Oa'$r\:a, steht es auch mit TY^axyaYa; die alte 
 
 erklilrungt ist die richtige Meine iibersetzung 
 
 lautete: O mensch, der befehl des Ahuramazda, er soil 
 dir nicht iibel erscheinen." t 
 
 *BiSHU seems to render into x\ssyrian the Persian arika (ARr?^^?) 
 "enemy." 
 
 fi. e., As an augmentless imperfect third singular (Cf. Grammar 
 95B.) and connected with Avestan s^m "seem". 
 
 :j:Cf. Oppert' s translation of the Median "homo quae est Oromazis 
 doctrina, ilia tibi mala ne videatur". Also cf. translation of the 
 Median given in foot note on p. 149. 
 
149 
 
 Gaubaruva, a Patisuvarian, spear-bearer of Darius 
 the king. 
 
 D. 
 
 Aspacana, quiver-bearer?, a server of the arrows of 
 Darius the king. 
 
 E. 
 
 This (is) a Macian. 
 
 vorgezogen werden, warend ich andererseits die richtigheit meiner 
 erklarung der ganzen stelle mit der med. und assyr. iibersetzung mehr 
 in iibereinstimmung finde als die friihere interpretation: Med. quae 
 Oromazdis doctrina earn ne malam putes. Assyr. ,,was Ormuzd be- 
 fiehlt, lehne dich nicht dagogen auf" (Bezold). 
 
 Fiir ma starava scheint mir weder Bollensens iibersetzung ,,falle 
 nicht ab" noch Bartholoraae's ahnliche ,,verliere, verlasse nicht den 
 pfad" geniigend von den vorhergehended aufforderungen sich abzu- 
 heben, und ich haltedaherBartholomae's zweiten vorschlag ,,beflecke 
 ihn (den pfad) nicht'' (zu avest. a-star«ieti) fiir richtiger." For 
 Thumbs' connection between O. P. thad and Skt. fad, cf. Brugmann, 
 Grunde. I, 397. 
 
ISO 
 
 THE INSCRIPTIONS OF XERXES AT 
 PERSEPOLIS. 
 
 (PERSIAN, MEDIAN, ASSYRIAN.) 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 D. 
 
 UPON EACH ONE OF THE FOUR PILLARS OF THE ENTRANCES TO THE 
 PALACE OF XERXES. 
 
 A great god (is) Auramazda who created this earth, 
 who created yonder heaven, who created man, who 
 created the spirit? of man, who created Xerxes king, 
 one king of many, one lord of many. I (am) Xerxes 
 the great king, king of kings, king of the countries, pos- 
 sessing many kinds of people, king of this great earth 
 far and wide, the son of Darius the king, the Achae- 
 menide. Says Xerxes the great king by the .grace of 
 Auramazda, this entrance possessing all countries I 
 made; much else (that is) beautiful (was) done by* this 
 Persian (people) which I did and which my father did; 
 whatever (that has been) done seems beautiful, all 
 that we did by the grace of Auramazda. Says Xer- 
 xes the king let Auramazda protect me and my king- 
 dom and what (was) done by me and what (was) 
 done by my father, (all) this let Auramazda protect. 
 
 UPON THE PILLARS ON THE WESTERN SIDE OF THE PALACE, WHERE XERXES 
 IS REPRESENTED STANDING WITH TWO ATTENDANTS, 
 
 Xerxes the great king, king of kings, the son of 
 Darius the king, the Achaemenide. 
 
 *I have followed the old interpretation, (Cf. Oppert, Journal Aslat 
 XIX, 177 "avec cette Perse, aid^ par ce peuple Perse"). If wo 
 can regard ana as the equivalent of the Avest. prep, ana (of. Gr. ava) 
 we can translate "through Persia" (Parsa being the instr. sing, or bet- 
 ter ace. plr.; Cf. Grammar, 86, B. Note i.) Cf. Zeitschrift ftlr ver- 
 glelcbende Sprachforschung. p. 127 [1891]). 
 
151 
 Ea. 
 
 UPON THE WALL BY THE STAIRS OF THE PALACE. 
 
 A great god (is) Auramazda who created this earth, 
 who created yonder heaven, who created man, who 
 created the spirit? of man,, who made Xerxes king, 
 one king of many, one lord of many. I (am) Xerxes 
 the great king, king of kings, king of the provin^ 
 ces possessing many kinds of people, king of this great 
 earth far and wide, son of Darius the king, the Achae- 
 menide. Says Xerxes the great king by the grace of 
 Auramazda this palace (lit. seat) I made; let Aura- 
 mazda protect me with the gods and my kingdom and 
 what (was) done by me. 
 
 Eb. 
 
 The above inscription is repeated on the western 
 stairs of the palace, 
 
 Ca. 
 
 UPON THE HIGHEST PILLAR NEAR THE SOUTHERN STAIRS. 
 
 A great god (is) Auramazda who created this earth, 
 who created yonder heaven, who created man, who 
 created the spirit ? of man, who made Xerxes king, 
 one king of many, one lord of many. I (am) Xerxes 
 the great king, king of kings, king of the provinces 
 possessing many kinds of people, king of this great 
 earth far and wide, son of Darius the king, the Achae- 
 menide. Says Xerxes the great king by the grace of 
 Aura* Mazda this palace (lit. seat) Darius the king 
 made who (was) my father; let Auramazda protect 
 me with the gods and what (was) done by my father 
 Darius the king, (all) this let Auramazda protect with 
 the gods. 
 
 * Notice that the two members of the compound are separated. CI 
 Original Text of the Inscriptions. 
 
152 
 
 Cb. 
 
 The above inscription is repeated upon the walls of 
 the southern stairs. 
 
 UPON THE STAIRS OF THE PALACE. 
 
 A great god (is) Auramazda who created this earth, 
 who created yonder heaven, who created man, who 
 created the spirit ? of man, who made Xerxes king, 
 one king of many, one lord of many. I (am) Xerxes 
 the great king, king of kings, king of the provinces 
 possessing many kinds of people, king of this great 
 earth far and wide, the son of Darius the king, the 
 Achaemenide. Says Xerxes the great king what (was) 
 done by me here and what (was) done by me afar, all 
 this I did by the grace of Auramazda; let Aura- 
 mazda protect me with the gods and my kingdom and 
 what (was) done by me. 
 
153 
 
 The Inscription of Xerxes at Alvend. 
 
 (PERSIAN, MEDIAN, ASSYRIAN.) 
 
 F. 
 
 The following inscription is engraven upon two 
 niches cut into a small rock: 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 A great god (is) Auramazda, who (is) greatest of 
 the gods, who created this earth, who created yonder 
 heaven, who created man, who created the spirit ? of 
 man, who made Xerxes king, one king of many, one 
 lord of many. I (am) Xerxes the great king, king of 
 kings, king of the provinces possessing many kinds of 
 people, king of this great earth far and wide, the son 
 of Darius the king, the Achaemenide, 
 
154 
 
 The Inscription upon the Vase of Count Caylus. 
 
 (PERSIAN, MEDIAN, ASSYRIAN, EGYPTIAN.) 
 
 Qa. 
 
 This vase contains the three customary forms of 
 cuneiform writing and a line of Egyptian hiero- 
 glyphics. The relic is preserved in Paris. Four 
 fragments of similar alabaster vases containing the 
 same quadrilingual inscription have been found by W. 
 K. Loftus in Susa, and are to be seen to-day in the 
 British Museum. 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 I (am) Xerxes, the great king. 
 
155 
 
 The Inscription at Van. 
 K. 
 
 (PERSIAN, MEDIAN, ASSYRIAN.) 
 
 This inscription is about sixty feet from the plain 
 below, engraven upon a niche in an enormous rock 
 which rises to the perpendicular height of one hundred 
 feet. 
 
 TRANSLATION, 
 
 A great god (is) Auramazda who (is) the greatest 
 of [the gods, who created this earth, who created 
 yonder heaven, who created man, who created the 
 spirit? of man, who made Xerxes king, one king of 
 many, one lord of many. I (am) Xerxes the great king, 
 king of kings, king of the provinces possessing many 
 kinds of people, king of this great earth far and wide, 
 the son of Darius the king, the Achaemenide. Says 
 Xerxes the king, Darius, the king who (was) my father, 
 he by the grace of Auramazda did what (was) beautiful 
 to a great extent, and he commanded to carve this 
 
 place ? he did not make the inscriptions inscribed; 
 
 afterwards I commanded to inscribe this inscription; 
 (let Auramazda protect me with the gods and my 
 kingdom and what (has been) done by me.*) 
 
 ^Supplied from the Assyrian version. 
 
156 
 
 THE INSCRIPTION OF ARTAXERXES I. (Qb) 
 
 (PERSIAN, MEDIAN, ASSYRIAN, EGYPTIAN.) 
 
 This inscription, which is quadrilingual is engraven 
 upon a vase which is preserved in the treasury of St. 
 Mark's at Venice. 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 Artaxerxes,* the great king. 
 
 *The cuneiform text spells the name of the monarch on the vase 
 ARDAKHCASHCA. This spelling must be due either to foreign pronun- 
 ciation or to the ignorance of the workman. Elsewhere the cunei- 
 form characters given the regular artakhshatra. Cf. Original 
 Text of the Inscriptions. 
 
157 
 
 THE INSCRIPTION OF DARIUS II. (L.) 
 
 (PERSIAN, MEDIAN, ASSYRIAN.) 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 ABOVE THE POSTS OF THE WINDOWS IN THE PALACE AT PERSEPOLIS. 
 
 (This) lofty stone structure (has been) made by (one 
 belonging to) the race of Darius the king.^ 
 
 *The Median and Assyrian translate the last of this legend "in the 
 house of Darius the king." 
 
158 
 
 THE INSCRIPTION OF ARTAXERXES 
 MNEMON AT SUSA. 
 
 (PERSIAN, MEDIAN, ASSYRIAN.) 
 
 This inscription is upon the base of one of the col- 
 umns in the ruins of what once must have been a great 
 palace. Much of this building was used for the pave- 
 ment of other edifices by the races which in after time 
 possessed this spot. 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 a. 
 
 I (am) Artaxerxes, the great king, king of kings, 
 the son of Darius* the king. 
 
 b. 
 
 UPON THE BASE OF THE PILLARS IN THE LARGB ROW OF COLUMNS. 
 
 This palace seems to have been fashioned after the 
 model of that of Darius at Persepolis. In connection 
 with this edifice it is interesting to refer to Dan. viii. 
 2. **And it came to pass when I saw, that I was in 
 Susa (or Shushan) in the palace," etc. 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 Says Artaxerxes the great king, king of kings, 
 king of the countries, king of the earth, the son of 
 Darius the king; Darius (was) the son of Artaxerxes 
 the king; Artaxerxes (was) the son of Xerxes the 
 king: Xerxes (was) the son of Darius the king; Darius 
 (was) the son of Hystaspes, the Achaemenide; this 
 
 building Darius, my ancestor made 
 
 Artaxerxes (my) grandfather Anakata 
 
 and Mithra by the grace of Auramazda the 
 
 building I made; let Auramazda, Anahata and Mithra 
 protect me 
 
 ♦Cf. Grammar, 24. DARaYava(H)usH (Darius) although having a stem 
 in u is treated like nouns whose stems end in a. So in Prakrit there 
 is a strong tendency for the so-called first declension to trespass upon 
 the others, thus breaking down the barriers which were observed by 
 the Sanskrit. 
 
159 
 
 THE INSCRIPTION OF ARTAXERXES 
 OCHUS AT PERSEPOLIS. (P.) 
 
 (PERSIAN. ) 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 UPON THE STEPS OF THE PALACE. 
 
 A great god (is) Auramazda who created this earth, 
 who created yonder heaven, who created man, who 
 created the spirit? of man, who made me, Artaxerxes, 
 king, one king of many, one lord of many. Says 
 Artaxerxes the great king, king of kings, king of 
 countries, king of the earth. I (am) the son of Arta- 
 xerxes, the king; Artaxerxes (was) the son of Darius 
 the king; Darius (was) the son of Artaxerxes the 
 king; Artaxerxes (was) the son of Xerxes the king; 
 Xerxes (was) the son of Darius the king; Darius was 
 the son of Hystaspes by name; Hystaspes was the son 
 of Arshama by name, the Achaemenide. Says Artax- 
 erxes the king this lofty stone structure (was) made 
 by me during my reign (lit. under me). Says Artax- 
 erxes the king let Auramazda and the god Mithra 
 protect me and this country and what (was) done by 
 me. 
 
THE INSCRIPTION OF ARSACES, 
 
 (PERSIAN.) 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 UPON THE SEAL OF GROTEFEND. 
 
 R. 
 
 Arsaces by name, son of Athiyabaushana. 
 
PERSIAN-ENGLISH 
 
 VOCABULARY, 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 For the sake of convenience in comparison, the same method of 
 transliteration is adopted for Sanskrit and Avestan words as for Old 
 Persian. 
 
 A. 
 
 A, — prefix, to. Skt., a; Avest. , a; Lat. a(?) 'from'. 
 (For postpositive a, cf. Bezz. Beitr. XIII.) 
 
 Ai, — pron. root in ait<2, aiv<^. 
 
 Ait<7, — n. pr., this, that. Skt. et^t; Avest., aet^d; 
 Lat., iste; Goth., thata; Eng., that. 
 
 K\na, — name of the father of Naditabira. 
 
 Aiv^, — one. Skt., ek^; Avest., aev<^. 
 
 Autiyar^, — name of a country in Armenia. 
 
 Aur^ or A(h)ur^, — i) m., master, ruler) 2) f., god- 
 dess. Skt., asur^; Avest., ahur^. 
 
 Aur^m^zda or A(h)ur^m^zda, — the name of the 
 greatest deity. Aur^, see above; m^izda, com- 
 pound of m^z, great: Skt., m^h^t; Lat., mag- 
 nus; Goth., mag; AS., magan; Eng., might; and 
 da, give: Skt., da; Avest., da; Lat., do: or da, 
 know. 
 
 Akhsh, — to see, Skt., akshi; Lat., oc-ulus. (Cf. 
 Paul Kretschmer in Zitsch. fiir vergl. Sprach- 
 forsch, p. 432 [1 891]). 
 
 — with p^ti, to oversee, rule. 
 
 Akhsh^ta,- — whole, entire, perfect. Fern, of an ad- 
 jective, akhsh^t^. Skt., aksh<3:t^. 
 
1 64 
 
 Ag^ta, — nomen 2igQr\t\s', coiner^ frtend{}). Cf. g^m. 
 
 Aj(?), — drive, do. Skt., aj; Lat., ago. (It is pos- 
 sible to refer 3.]ata to j^n, smite.) 
 
 Atiy, — yerhsX^r&^i'K, beyo7td, across. Skt. . ati; Lat., 
 et; Old German, anti(.?); Germ., und(.?); Eng. , 
 and(.?). 
 
 Ath<3:(n)g^in<3;, — stony ^ built of stone, 
 
 Athura, — Assyria. 
 
 Atrin<3;, — proper name. 
 
 Atriyadiy<^, — name of a month. 
 
 Ad(^, — then, thereupon. 
 
 Ad<^k<a:iy, — then. 
 
 Ad<^m, — /. Skt., ah^m; Avest., azem; Lat., ego; 
 Goth., ik; AS., ik or I; Eng., L (For kh in 
 amakham, cf. idg. Forschungen, p. i86 [1892]; 
 for position of m^iy and mam, cf. Wachernagel, 
 Uber ein Gesetz der idg. Wortstell, ibid.). 
 
 Aduk^nish. — name of a month. 
 
 An^^h^t^, — Genius of the waters. 
 
 Anam<3:k<3;. — name of a month. 
 
 Aniy<^, — i) indef. pron., another] 2) enemy} Skt.^ 
 a.nya; Avest., any a. 
 
 Anuv, — prep, with loc, along, by. Skt., anu. 
 
 Anushiy^, — follower. See anuv and shiyu; cf. Lat., 
 comes (con-eo). 
 
 A(n)t^r, — prep, with diCc, within, in. Skt, ant^r; 
 Avest., ant<3:re; Lat., inter; Goth., undar. 
 
 Ap<2, — verbal prefix, /r(?;;/. Skt., ap<3:; Avest., ap^; 
 Lat., ab; Goth., af; Eng., of. 
 
 Ap^t^r^, — remote, another. Comparative of ap^-. 
 
i6s 
 
 Ap^dan^, — work^ temple^ building. 
 
 Ap^^nyak^, — ancestor. 
 
 Ap<3:r^m, — adv., afterward. 
 
 Ap^riy, — near by. 
 
 Api, — zvater. Skt., ap; Avest. , ap. 
 
 Apiy, — to, also. Skt., api; Avest., api. 
 
 Abac<3;rish, — commerce. 
 
 Ab^shta, — law. 
 
 Abiy, — prep, with ace, to, against. Skt., abhi; 
 Avest., aibiy; Lat., ob(.?), ambi. 
 
 Abish, — prep, with loc, by, at. 
 
 Amuth^, — there, then. Skt., amutr^. 
 
 Kya<\aVia, — ace. pi., ay<^d<^na, sanctuaries, homes. 
 
 Ay^sta, — adv. or prep, with ace, according to, withy 
 unto (?). 
 
 Ar^k^drish, — name of a Persian mountain. 
 
 Ar^kh^, — name of an Armenian. 
 
 Ar^bay^, — i) Arabian; 2) Arab, Arabia. 
 
 Arik<3!, — enemy. Skt., ari. 
 
 Ariy^, — i) Aryan; 2) noble. Skt., ary^; Avest., 
 airya; New Persian, Iran; Keltic, erin; Eng., 
 Ir-ish. 
 
 Ariyar^mn^ or Ariyaramn^, — name of the great- 
 grandfather of Darius. Ariy^ and r^m, to rejoice. 
 (For change of stem, cf. Bartholomae, idg. 
 Forsch., p. 180 [1892]). 
 
 Aruv^st^m (.?) 
 
 Art^khsh^tra, — Artaxerxes. Arta (Avest., areta), 
 lifted up; and khsh^tr^, kingdom. 
 
i66 
 
 Artavardiya, — name of one of the commanders of 
 Darius Hystaspes. 
 
 Ard^khC(^shch^, — name of Artaxerxes as pronounced 
 by the Egyptians. 
 
 Ard<3:stan<^, — /li^-Zi structure. 
 
 Ardum<^nish, — name of one of the Persians who swore 
 with Darius against Smerdis. 
 
 Arbira, — Arbela\ a city upon the confines of Media. 
 
 Arm^niy<7, — i) Armenian\ 2) Armenia, 
 
 Arming, — name of Armenia. 
 
 Arminiy^, — Armenian. 
 
 Arsh<3:k^, — Arsaces. 
 
 Arshada, — name of a fortress in Arachasia. 
 
 Arsham<3!, — name of the grandfather of Darius Hys- 
 taspes. 
 
 Arshtish, — spear. Skt., rshti; Avest., arsti. 
 
 Arshtib^^r*^;, — spear-bearer. 
 
 Ava, — dem. pron., this, that. Avest., avrt:; Slav., 
 ova. 
 
 Av^, — verbal prefix, /r^;/^. Skt., av^. 
 
 Ava, — so long. Correl. to yava. 
 
 Av^tha, — thus. 
 
 Av^da, — i) there'y 2) thither. 
 
 — In ablative sense with sufifix sa, from thai place ^ 
 thence. 
 
 Av^p^ra, — thence. 
 
 Av^shciy, — whatever, anything, all. Awa-oXy. 
 
 Av^h. — aid, guard. Avest., avo. 
 
16/ 
 
 Av^h, — denom. from preceding. 
 
 — with prefix p^tiy, to seek aid. 
 
 Av^hy<3;radiy, — for this reason^ therefore. Composed 
 of gen. of pron. av^, and loc. of rad. 
 
 Av^h^n^m, — village] from root v^h, to dwell. Skt., 
 vas; Lat., vesta; Germ., woh-nen; AS., wesan; 
 Eng., was. 
 
 Ksagavta, — Sagartian. 
 
 As^g<2rtiya, — Sargartian. 
 
 As^bari, or asbari, — soldier) properly, a horseman. 
 
 Asp^c^na, — a proper name in Persia. Probably 
 from asp^, horse; according to Herodotus, the 
 name of a man. (For asp^, cf. Meyer in idg. 
 Forsch., p. 329 [1892]). 
 
 Asm^n, — heaven. Skt., a9m<3;n. 
 
 Ashn^iy, — near. 
 
 Azda, — knowledge. 
 
 Ah, — to be. Skt., as; Avest, ah; Lat., es-t; Goth., 
 is-t; Eng., is. 
 
 Ahifr^stad, — severe punishment, 
 
 I 
 
 I, — to go. Skt., I; Avest, I; Lat.. i-re. 
 
 — with prefix atiy, to go beyondy carry farther. 
 
 — with nij, to go forth. 
 
 — with p^tiy, to go against. 
 
 — with p^ra, to proceed. 
 
 — with ap(^ri, to follow, obey. 
 
 Ida, — here. Skt., ih^; Avest., idha. 
 
i68 
 
 Ima, — pron., Ms. Skt., ima; Avest., ima. 
 
 Im^ni, — name of a man in Susa, who excited a tumult 
 against Darius. 
 
 Ish, — to send. Skt, ish; Avest., ish. 
 
 — with prefix fr^, to send forth, 
 
 Ishu, — arrow. Skt, ishu. 
 
 Izav<3;, — tongue. 
 
 U 
 
 (H)u, — good, well. It occurs only in the beginning 
 of a compound. Skt., su; Avest., hu. 
 
 Uta, — and. Skt., uU; Avest., ut^. 
 
 Utan«, — name of one of the six who dethroned false 
 Smerdis. 
 
 Ud, — verbal prefix. Skt., ud. 
 
 Up^, — prefix, under, to. Skt, up^; Avest, upa; 
 Lat., sub. 
 
 Upa, — prep, with ace, under. Cf. above. 
 
 Up^d^r^(n)m^, — name of a man in Susiana. 
 
 Up^riy, — prep, with ace, above, over. Skt., up<3:ri; 
 Avest., upara; Lat., super; Goth., ufar; Eng., 
 over. 
 
 Up^sta, — aid, help. Upa and sta; cf. Germ., bei- 
 stand. 
 
 (H)ufr^st^, — see p^rs. 
 
 (H)ufratu, — Euphrates. From u, well; and fra (per- 
 haps a Semitic root), to flow. 
 
 (H)ub<3!rt^, — see b^r. 
 
 (H)um«rtiy<2, — possessing good men. 
 
 (H)uv^khsh^t^r<3;, — name of a king of Media. 
 
1 69 
 
 (H)uv^j^, — Susiana. 
 
 (H)uv^jiy^, — an inhabitant of Susiana. 
 
 (H)uv^sp^, — possessing good horses. 
 
 (H)uvaip^shiy^, — one's own pleasure, independence, 
 (h)uva, self; Skt., sv^; Lat. , suus. 
 
 Uvad^id^y^, — name of a city in Persia. 
 
 (H)uvam<3:rshiyush, — committing suicide. (h)uva, 
 self; Skt., sv<3;: and m^rsh; Avest., meresh, to die. 
 
 (H)uvar<2z^mi or (H)uvar^z^miy^, — Chorasmia. 
 
 Us,— cf. ud. 
 
 Us^t^sh^n^, — lofty building, temple. Us (see above) 
 and t^sh; Skt., t^^ksh; Avest., t^sh, to form; 
 Lat., tig-mum. 
 
 (H)ushk«, — dry. Avest., hushka. (Cf. idg. 
 
 Forschungen, Bartholomae, p. 488 [1892]). 
 
 Uz^ma, — cross. 
 
 Uhyam^, — name of a castle in Armenia. 
 
 K 
 
 K^, — interrog. pron., who. Skt., k^; Avest., Va\ 
 Lat., qui. 
 
 — with personal or relative pronoun having an in- 
 definite force: {whomever. 
 
 Y^UMia, — mountain. 
 
 K«t^p^tuk<3:, — Cappadocia. 
 
 Y^an, — to dig, scratch. Skt., kh^n; Avest, Vax\\ 
 Lat., cun-iculus. 
 
 — with prefix av^, to throw down with violence^ 
 displace. 
 
 — with ni, to dig down, destroy, 
 
 — with vi, to destroy. 
 
I70 
 
 Kamana, — de sir ouSy faithful. Skt, Vava^ to desire; 
 few} 
 
 K<3;(m)p^d^, — name of a province in Media. 
 
 K^(m)bujiy/3:, — Cambyses. 
 
 K^r, — to do. Skt., kr; Avest.. Vax\ Lat., cre-o. 
 
 — with prefix p<3;ri, to guard. 
 K^shciy, — indef. pron., whoever, 
 
 — with preceding n^^-iy, no one. 
 Karkay — name of a people. 
 
 Kapish<3:kani, — name of a fortress in Arachasia. 
 
 Kam^, — wishy desire. Skt., kam^. 
 
 Kar<3:, — i) people] 2) army. Cf. kar. 
 
 Kug^n<7:ka, — name of a city in Persia. 
 
 Kud(u)ru, — name of a city in eastern Media. 
 
 Kuru, — Cyrus. 
 
 Kushiy<3;, — name of a people. 
 
 Kh 
 
 Khsh^tr^ — nom. and ace, khsh^tr^m; rule, king- 
 dom. Skt., ksh^tr^; Avest., \i\\s\ia\}i\ra. 
 
 Khsh^tr^^pav^n, — nom., khsh(2tr<2pava; satrap. From 
 khsh^tr<aj (cf. above) and pa (to guard, protect). 
 
 Khsh^thrit<3;, — name of a man who excited a tumult 
 against Darius in Media. 
 
 Khsh^p^, — ace, khsh^p^; night, Skt, ksh^p; 
 Avest., khsh^p. 
 
 Khshay^thiy^, — king. (Cf. Brugmann in idg. 
 Forschungen, p. 177 [1892]). 
 
 Khsh^y arsha, — Xerxes. 
 
171 
 
 Khshi (?) 
 
 — with prefix p^ti, to rule, reign. (It is possible to 
 refer patiy^khsh^iy to akhsh, see). 
 
 Khshnas, — to know. (Perhaps connected with Skt. , 
 J;2a; Avest., khshna; Lat., co-gno-sco; Goth., 
 kaun; Germ., kann; Eng. , know, can). 
 
 G 
 
 G^^itha, — flock, herd. 
 
 Qa\}S:>axwva, — Gobryas. The name of a man. 
 
 G^umat^, — name of a Magian. 
 
 G^ushrt:, — ace. dual, g^usha; ear. Avest., g<3:osh^. 
 
 G^(n)dut<^v^, — name of a country in western Ara- 
 
 chosia. 
 Qia{yi)Aaxa, — name of a country near the Indus. 
 
 G^m, — to go. Skt., g^m; Avest., g^m; Lat.,veniD 
 (for guemio .?); Goth., quam; Germ., kommen; 
 Eng. , come. 
 
 — with prefix a, to approach, come. 
 
 — with h^m, to gather ones self together, 
 
 — with p^ra, to depart. 
 
 G^rb, — to seize, take. Skt., gr^bh; Avest., g^rep; 
 Germ., greif-en (J); Eng., gripe (.?). 
 
 G<^rm<3;p^d^, — name of a month. 
 
 G^st^, — revealed, declared. Skt., g^d. 
 
 G<^thu, — \) foundation, firm place', 2) throne. Avest., 
 gathu. 
 
 Gud, — Skt., guh; Avest., guz. 
 
 — with prefix ap<^, to conceal. 
 
 Gub, — to speak) middle, to be called ox named. 
 
172 
 
 C 
 
 Cmshpi, — son of Achaemenes. 
 
 C^shm^, — eye. 
 
 Ca, — end., a7id. Skt., Q.a\ Avest, ca; Lat., que. 
 
 Ciy, — neut,, ciy and cish; who, what. Skt., cit; 
 Avest., ci. 
 
 — cishciy, whatever. (For change of etym. t to sh 
 before c, cf. idg. Forschungen, p. 488 [1891]). 
 
 — anivrtshciy, some other. 
 Ciya(n)k^r^m, — how many, manifold, 
 Cicikhri, — name of a man. 
 
 Cita, — so long as. 
 Citr^, — seed, offspring. 
 Citr^(n)t^khm^, — name of a man. 
 
 J 
 
 J^, — to supplicate, pray; to grant prayer, 
 Jatar, — nom. j^ta, enemy. Cf. j^n. 
 J^n, — to smite. Skt., h^^n; Avest., ]axi. 
 
 — with prefix av^, to smite down, kill. 
 
 — with fr^, to cut off. 
 
 Jiv, — to live. Skt., jiv; Avest., jiv; Lat., vivo. 
 Jiv^, — life. 
 
 T 
 
 T^iyiy^ or maly'iya, — doubtful word (witness ?). 
 
 T^uma, — race, family. Avest., t^okhma. 
 
 T«k^b<3;r^, — epithet of the Greeks, wearing crowns, 
 wearing long hair. 
 
173 
 
 Takhmaspsida, — name of one of the commanders of 
 Darius. 
 
 Tt^khs, — fo construct^ build. Skt. , trt:ksh ; Avest. , 
 t^sh. 
 
 — with prefix h<^m, to work together, help, work. 
 
 Tacava, — building, temple. 
 
 Tar, — to cross, put across. Skt., tr ; Avest. , t^r; 
 Lat., in-tra-re, trans; Old German, durh; Eng., 
 through. 
 
 — with prefix fr^, to go forward. 
 
 — with vi, to put over or across. 
 
 Taradaraya, — across the sea) from t^r<3;, across, and 
 davaya, the sea. 
 
 T^rs, — to tremble, fear. Skt., tr^^is; Avest., t^rs-ti. 
 
 Tar<3;va, — name of a city in Yutia of Persia. 
 
 Tigr^, — name of a fortress in Armenia. 
 
 Tigra, — Tigris] perhaps feminine of an adjective, 
 tigr^, sharp. Skt., tij. Cf. Dionys. perig. v. 
 984, ''The Medes call the Tigris an arrow." 
 
 Tigr<i:kh<^ud^, — name of a Scythian tribe. 
 
 Tuv<^m, — thou. Skt., tv^m; Avest., thw^m; Lat., 
 tu; Germ., du. (Cf. Wachernagel, tiber ein Ge- 
 setz der idg. Wortstellung, idg. Forsch., p. 403 
 [1892]). 
 
 Ty^, — rel. pron., who, that. Skt., y^; Avest., hy^; 
 
 — ty^patiy, whatever. 
 
174 
 
 Th 
 
 Thai^^rci, — name of a month. 
 
 Thakata., — t/ien (?). (This meaning is a conventional 
 one. A recent theory proposes a widely differ- 
 ent signification, but at present both the etymol- 
 ogy and interpretation of the word are doubtful). 
 
 Thatagush, — name of a people. 
 
 Th^d, — ^0 £•{?, err(?). (Perhaps connected with: Skt., 
 sad; Lat., sideo; Got., sat; Eng., sit). 
 
 Th<3:h, — U say^ speak. Thatiy for Th^h^tiy. 
 
 Thukhr^, — name of a Persian. 
 
 ThwraYshara, — name of a month. 
 
 Th^rd, — kind, sort, manner, 
 
 Tr 
 
 Tr<3:r. 
 
 — with prefix ni, to restore. 
 
 Tritiy^, — third. Skt., tritly^; Avest., thrity^; 
 Lat., tertius; Goth., thridya; Eng., third. 
 
 D 
 
 D(3;usht^r, — friend, 
 
 D<3:n, — to flow. 
 
 D^r, — to hold, to hold one's self) to delay, halt, 
 Skt. , dhr ; Avest. , d^r. 
 
 D^r^y^, — sea. 
 
 D^rsh,— /^ dare, subdue. Skt., dhrsh; Avest, 
 d^resh; Eng., durst. 
 
 D^rsh^m, — strongly, very. 
 
 D^rsh^m^, — insolence, ferocity ^ violence. 
 
175 
 
 D^st^, — hand. Skt., \ias\.a\ Avest., zasta. 
 D^sh<3;bari, — stretching out the hand^ submissive, 
 
 D^hyaush, — region^ province. Skt., d<a:syu; Avest., 
 
 daqyu. 
 
 Da, — to give. Skt., da; Avest., da; Lat., da-re. 
 
 Da, — to place y create, do, make. Skt., dha; Lat., 
 con-do, cre-do; AS., dom; Eng., doom. 
 
 Da, — to know, understand. Avest., da. 
 
 Dat^, — law. Cf. da. 
 
 Dad^^rshi, — a name of an Armenian and Persian. 
 
 Daduhy<3:, — one of the six who, with Darius Hystas- 
 pes, deprived false Smerdis of his kingdom. 
 
 Dar^y^V(^(h)u, — Darius. Cf. d^r; for second mem- 
 ber of the compound, cf. Skt. v<7su, good; as a 
 noun, wealth: perhaps from was, to shine (like 
 Eng. splendid). Cf. Lat., us-tus, Ves-uvius; 
 Eng., East. 
 
 Dasy^m^n, — he who stretches forth, serves; an at- 
 tendant (perhaps). 
 
 Di, — pron. root, this. (Cf. Wachernagel, iibdi- ein 
 Gesetz der idg. Wortstellung, idg. Forsch., p. 
 405 [1892]). 
 
 Di, — to see. Avest., di. 
 
 Di, — to remove, take away, 
 
 Dida, — castle. 
 
 Dipi, — letter, inscription. Perhaps connected with 
 Skt., lip. 
 
 Duban<3!, — name of a country in Babylonia. 
 
 Dur^, — loc. durmy, dur<3:y, and dur^^i; far^ distant. 
 Skt., dur<^. 
 
176 
 
 Duru j, — to deceive, be false. Skt. , druh ; Avest. , druj. 
 
 Duruv^, — firm, well, sound, secure. Skt., dhruv^. 
 
 Duv^isht^m, — a long time. 
 
 Duv^r, — to make, accomplish (?). 
 
 Duv^ra, — door, court. Skt., dvar<^; Avest, ^vata, 
 
 Duv<3:rthi, — gate. 
 
 Duvitat^rn^m, — separately (?), for a long ti7ne {J). 
 
 Duvitiy^^, — second. Skt., dvitiy^; Avest., bity<^; 
 Lat., duo, bis; Goth., tvai; AS., twa; Eng., 
 two. 
 
 Dushiyar^, — misfortune, from dush. Skt., dus, ill, 
 and yar<3;; Avest., yare. 
 
 TixaM^a, — lie, falsehood. Cf. duruj. 
 
 T>xa\x\axia, — false, deceiving, 
 
 Dr<a;(n)g<3J, — a long time, 
 
 N 
 
 N^ib<3;, — beautiful, pretty. 
 
 N<^iy, — not. 
 
 N^dit^bir<^, — name of a man who excited opposition 
 
 against Darius in Babylon. 
 
 N^pa, — grandson. Skt., n^pat; Avest., napat; 
 Lat., nepo(t)s; AS., nefa. 
 
 N^bukudr^c^r<3;, — name of a Babylonian king. 
 
 N^bunit^^, — name of the last Babylonian king. 
 
 N^v^m^, — ninth. Skt., n^v^m^; Avest., n<?v^zn; 
 Lat., novem; Goth., niun; AS., nigan; Eng. , 
 nine. 
 
177 
 
 Nam^n, — name. Skt., nam^n; Avest., nam^n; 
 Lat., nomen; Goth., namo; Eng., name. 
 
 Nau, — ship. Skt., naus; Lat., navis. 
 
 Nah<3:, — nose. Skt., nasa. 
 
 Ni, — to conduct, lead. Skt., ni. 
 
 Nij, — verbal prefix, /r^w. Skt., nis; Avest., nish. 
 
 Nip^d. — loc. nip^diy, footprint, on foot. Ni, down 
 (Skt., ni; Lat., in; AS., in), and p<^d, foot (Skt., 
 p<^d; Avest., p^dh^; Lat., pe(d)s; Goth., fotus; 
 Eng., foot). 
 
 Nisay^;?, — name of a country in Media. 
 
 Ny<2k^, — grandfather. Avest., nyak^, 
 
 Nur^m, — nozv. 
 
 P 
 
 P^^ishiyauvada, — name of a region. 
 
 P^t, — to fall. Skt., p^t; Lat., peto. 
 
 — with prefix ud, to rise up. 
 
 YaXXy, — prep, and verbal prefix. \) in \ 2) against \ 
 3) throughout. Often postpositive. Skt., pr^ti; 
 Avest., p<?iti. 
 
 Ya\Skaxa, — image, effigy. 
 
 P^tigr^^b^na, — name of a cit}^ in Parthia. 
 
 P^tiprt:d^m, — in its own place. From p^tiy (cf. 
 above) and p^d (cf. nipcid). 
 
 P^tish, — with ace, tozuards. Cf. p<^tiy. 
 
 P^thi, — way, road. Skt., p^-zth^^; Avest., p^nth^n; 
 Lat., pon(t)s; Old Germ., pad, fad; AS., padh; 
 Eng., path. 
 
 P^r^uv^, — eastern. 
 
178 
 
 Taragay — name of a Persian mountain. 
 
 "Parana, — former. 
 
 Tara, — prep., postpositive, and verbal prefix, from, 
 backward. Skt., p^ra; Lat., per; Goth., fra; 
 Old Germ., fer; Germ., ver; AS., for, as in 
 Eng. , forgive. 
 
 P^riy, — prep, and verbal prefix, around, about, con- 
 cerning. Skt., p^ri; Avest., pairi. 
 
 P^ru, — gen. plur., p<3:runam and p<^ruvnam; much, 
 many. Skt., puru; Avest., pouru; Lat., plus; 
 Goth., filu; Germ., viel. 
 
 Yarwva, — anterior eastern; ace. neut., paruv<a:m: be- 
 fore. Avest., "^aoViXYa. 
 
 YarMviya, — before, anterior', in abl. sense, h<7ca p<«- 
 ruviy^ta. Skt. Ved. , purvy^; Avest., p/^ourvy^. 
 
 P<3;ruz^n^, — gen. plur., p^ruz^nanam and p^ruvz^na- 
 nam; possessing many kiyids of peoples. 
 
 Tarthava, — Parthia. 
 
 P^rs, — i) to ask', 2) to inquire about something. 
 Skt., pr^ch; Avest., p^res; Lat., preco; Goth., 
 frah; Germ., fragen. 
 
 — with preceding (h)u, to examine carefully^ punish'y 
 part. (h)u-fr<2st^m. 
 
 — with prefix p^ti, to examine, read. 
 P^sa, — after. 
 
 P^sav<3:, — afterwards, thereafter. P^sa and av^. 
 
 Pa, — to protect, sustain. Skt., pa; Avest., pa; Lat., 
 pa-vi, pa-scor. 
 
 Patishuv^ri, — a race inhabiting a portion of Persia. 
 
 Pars^, — Persia, Persiaft. 
 
179 
 
 Titar, — father. Skt., pitr; Avest., pit^; Lat., pa- 
 ter; Goth., fadar; Germ., vater; AS., faeder; 
 Eng., father. Cf. pa. 
 
 Pish, — to scrape, graze. Skt., pish; Lat., pinso. 
 
 — with prefix ni, to zurite on. 
 
 Pirav^. — Nile. 
 
 Putiy^, — name of a people. 
 
 Putr^, — son. Skt., putr<^; Avest., puthr^; Lat., 
 puer (.''). 
 
 ¥ra, — verbal prefix, before, for. Skt, pr^; Avest., 
 ira] Lat., pro; Eng., fore. 
 
 Fr^^t^m^, — first, leader. 
 
 Fr^mana, — authority, command, precepts. 
 
 Fr^v^rti, — proper name, PJiraortes. 
 
 Fr^h^rv^m, — ace. neut. in adverbial sense, altogether. 
 From fr^ and h^rv^:, h^ruv^. 
 
 Frad^, — name of a ruler in Margia. 
 
 B^g^, — god. Skt., bh<^g^; Avest., b^gh^; Goth., 
 ga-bigs. 
 
 B^g^bukhsh<^, — name of one of those who with Da- 
 rius dethroned false Smerdis; Megabyzos. 
 
 B^gabign^, — name of a Persian. 
 
 B^(n)d, — to bind, Skt., b^ndh; Avest., b^nd; 
 Goth., bindan; Eng., bind. 
 
 B<^(n)d<3:k<2, — subject, servant. 
 
i8o 
 
 B^r, — to bear ^ sustain^ protect, Skt. , bhr; Avest. , 
 b^r; Lat., fero; Goth., bairan; AS., beran; 
 Eng., bear. 
 
 — with prefix p^ti, to bring back^ replace^ restore. 
 
 — with p^ra, to bear azvay. 
 
 — with iva, to carry off, assign. 
 
 B^rdiy^, — name of the brother of Cambyses, Smerdis. 
 
 Bakhtri, — Bactria. 
 
 Bag^yadi, — name of a month. 
 
 Baji, — tribute', from root \>a). Skt., bh^j, to allot. 
 
 Babiru, — Babylon. 
 
 Babiruviy^, — Babylonian. 
 
 Bu, — to be. Skt., bhu; Avest., bu; Lat., fuo, fui, 
 perhaps bam (in amabam); AS., beom; Germ., 
 bin; Eng., be. 
 
 Bumi, — ground, earth. Skt., bhumi; Avest., bumi. 
 
 Brat^r, — brother. Skt., bhratr; Avest., brat<7r; 
 Lat., frater; Goth., brothar; AS., brodher; 
 Eng., brother. 
 
 M 
 
 yidka, — name of a people. 
 
 yiagu, — Magian, a Median people from whom the 
 priests were elected. 
 
 M^ciy^, — name of a people. 
 
 M^thisht^, — the greatest, leader. 
 
 yian, — to thijik. ponder. Skt., m^n; Avest., m^n; 
 Lat., mens; Germ., meinen. 
 
 M^zn, — to remain. Avest., man; Lat., maneo. 
 
I8i 
 
 M^r, — to die. Skt., mr; Avest., m^r; Lat., mo- 
 rior; AS., mordh. 
 
 M^irgu, — name of a region east and north of Areia. 
 
 M^rtiy^, — i) mortal, man\ cf. vaax above. 2) name 
 of a man who excited a tumult against Darius. 
 In P. the gen. sing, is contracted to m^rtihy^a:. 
 
 M^a-rduniy^, — name of a man, Mardoniiis. 
 
 Ma, — to measure. Skt., ma; Avest., ma; Lat., 
 meto. 
 
 — with prefix a, past part., am^t^, tested^ triedy 
 prolonged. 
 
 Ma, — prohibitive particle, 72^/. Skt. , ma; Avest., ma. 
 
 Maty^, — that not, lest. 
 
 Mad^, — Median, Media. 
 
 Maniy<3:, — place of remaining, dwelling. Qi. m^zn. 
 
 Marg^y^ or Marg<2v^, — Margianian. 
 
 Mah^, — montJr, contracted gen. mahya. Skt., mas^; 
 Lat., mensis; AS., mona; Eng., month. 
 
 M(i)thr^, — name of a Persian God. 
 
 Mudray^, — Egypt', nom. plur., Egyptians. 
 
 Y 
 
 Y^una, — Ionian, Ionia. Skt., Y^v^n^. 
 
 Y^tha, — i) as, when; 2) because', 3) in order that^ 
 that. From rel. root, ya. 
 
 Y<a:da, — duty. 
 
 Y<3:diy, — i) ^y*; 2^ when. Skt., y^di; Avest., yedhi. 
 
 — with p^diy, if perchance. 
 Y^n^iy, — (i') 
 
1 82 
 
 Yata, — i) during, while) 2) until. From rel. root, ya. 
 Yan^, — favor. Avest., yan<3;. 
 Yava, — as long as. Skt., yav<^t. 
 Yutiya, — name of a region in Persia. 
 Yuviya, — canal. 
 
 R^uc^, — ace. sing., rauca; day. Connected with 
 Skt. , rue, to shine; Lat., luceo; AS., leoht; 
 Eng., light. 
 
 R^ut^, — river. 
 
 Rrtkha, — name of a city in Persia. 
 
 R^ga, — name of a district in Media. 
 
 R^d(?),— Skt, r^h. 
 
 — with prefix av^, to relinquish, leave. 
 
 R<7s, — to come. Desiderative: cf. Brugmann in idg. 
 Forsch., p. 173 (1892). 
 
 — with prefix p<^ra, to arrive. 
 
 — with prefix ni, to descend. 
 Rad, — joy, delight. 
 
 — loc. sing., radiy with gen., for the sake of 
 
 — av<^hyaradiy, for the sake of this thing, for this 
 reason. 
 
 Rast^, — right. 
 
 V 
 
 V^in, — to see, behold. The middle is used in the 
 passive sense. Avest., vaen. 
 
 V^umis^, — name of a Persian. 
 
i83 
 
 V^j, — to lead. Skt., v^h; Avest., vaz\ AS., wegan. 
 
 V^y^spar^, — name of a Persian. 
 
 V^r, — to declare, make {o7te) believe^ convince, 
 
 V^rkan^, — Hyrcania. 
 
 Yardana, — nom. sing., v^rd^n^m, fortified town,, 
 city, state. Connected with Skt. vr dh, to increase; 
 Avest., va-red; AS., waldan, weald. 
 
 V^siy, — much, very, greatly. (Possibly connected 
 with Greek incoVy "nach Wunsch". Barthol- 
 omae). 
 
 V^shn^, — desire, power, grace. Cf. v^s, to desire. 
 
 Vrtzr^k^, — great. 
 
 Yahyazdata, — name of a man who excited a tumult 
 against Darius Hystaspes. 
 
 Vrt:h^uk<^, — name of a Persian. 
 
 Va, — enclitic particle, or. Skt., va; Lat., ve. 
 
 Vith, — i) clan; 2) race, fellow. 
 
 Vithiy^, — pertaining to the same race. 
 
 Vithin(i'), — possessifig the same race. The instr. 
 plur. vithibish, which alone justifies the sup- 
 position of the existence of this adjective, I have 
 explained in grammar (86, c) as from noun vith. 
 
 V\da,— {J) 
 
 Vid<3:rn^, — name of a Persian. 
 
 Vi(n)d^fra, — name of a Mede. 
 
 Vi(n)drtfr^na, — name of a Persian. 
 
 Viy^khn^, — name of a month. 
 
 Viy<3:t^r^y^m, — see t^r. 
 
 Vivan^, — name of a Persian. 
 
1 84 
 
 Vis^, — all, every, Skt., vi9va. 
 
 Vis<3:d<7hyu, — ace. sing, ra'3.'=>z.v\sa^a\iy\xv(\, possessing 
 all provinces. 
 
 V\s>i^azax\a, — g-en. plur. masc. visp<3:zanam, possessing 
 all kinds of peoples. 
 
 Vishtasp<3:, — Hystaspes, the father of Darius. 
 
 S 
 
 Saka, — Scyth ian, Scyth ia. 
 
 S<2ku(n)k<7, — name of a man who excited opposition 
 among the Sakae against Darius Hystaspes. 
 
 S^n,— (.?) 
 
 — with prefix vi, to destroy. 
 ^av,— to kill.ij) 
 
 Sik^y^uv^ti, — name of a fortress in Media. 
 
 Sugud<^, — Sogdiana. 
 
 Skudr^, — name of a people. 
 
 St(3;r, — to sin.Q) 
 
 Sta, — to stand. Skt., stha; Avest., sta; Lat., sta-re; 
 AS., standan; Eng., stand. 
 
 — with prefix av^ (caus.), to establish, constitute. 
 
 — with ni (caus.), to enjoin, command. 
 Stan^, — place. 
 
 Sp<2;rd^, — name of a people. 
 
 Sh 
 
 Sh^ and Shi, — stem of a pron. end., 3 pers. Skt., 
 s^; Avest., he. (Cf. Wackernagel, iibcr ein Ge- 
 setz der idg. Wortstellung, idg. Forsch., p. 404 
 [1892]). 
 
185 
 
 Sharastihara, — hozv-bearer\ or perhaps for arshti- 
 \iaxa, spcar-bearer. 
 
 Shiyati, — spirit, intelligence, wisdom. (J) (shay<7- 
 tim, P.) 
 
 Shiyu, — to go, set out. 
 
 Shugud^?, — see Sugud^. 
 
 Z 
 
 7.axa{x\)Va, — Drangiana. 
 
 Z<7zan<7, — name of a fortified town near Babylon. 
 
 Zur^, — power. 
 
 Zuvakara, — despot. From zur^ (see above) and kara 
 
 (see krtr). 
 
 H 
 
 H<7ina. — army. Skt., sena; Avest. , haen^. 
 
 H^uv, — tJiis. Skt., a-sau; Avest. hau. 
 
 H^kham^ni, — Ac h aeme nes, ox\^\vi?i\.or oi \.\\^ race of 
 the Achaemenides. 
 
 H<?kham^nishiy(^, — of the race of Achaemenides. 
 
 H^ngmrt:tan<7, — Ecbata?ia; leading city of Media, at 
 the foot of the mountains of Alvend. From 
 hrt-m (together), and g<7m (to go). 
 
 Hrtca, — prep, with ablative, /?'^;>^. Avest., hac-ei. 
 
 Hrt'(n)j, — to draw throiv. 
 
 — with fr^;, to throw forth. 
 
 H^7d, — to sit. Skt., s^d; Avest., hrtd; Lat., sedeo; 
 AS., sittan; Eng. , sit. 
 
 — witn prefix ni (caus.), to constitute, establish. 
 
1 86 
 
 H^da, — prep, with instrumental, witJi. Skt., ?>a\\a\ 
 Avest., \\a<\\\a. 
 
 H^dish, — place, dwelling, royal scat, palace. Cf. h<7d. 
 
 H^(n)duga, — edict. 
 
 Waxi(X\\.a, — name of a Babylonian. 
 
 Y\.avs\, — verbal prefix, together with. Skt., s<7m: 
 
 Avest., h^m. 
 H<7m^, — together, all. Skt., s^^m^:; Avest., \\.avc\a. 
 
 Lat., simul; Goth., sama; Germ., zusammen; 
 
 AS., same. 
 
 H^mrt-pitrtir, — having a co^nmon father. From h^m^ 
 and pit<^r. 
 
 Yiavaara, — ivar. Skt., s^^m^-r^;. 
 
 Wavciaxawa, — nom. and ace. sing., h^m^r^rn^'rm; con- 
 flict, battle. 
 
 H^mat^r, — having a conimo7i mother. From h^m 
 and mrtJt^r. Skt., matr; Lat., mater; Fng., 
 mother. Cf. ma. 
 
 WamitrWa, — rebellious. 
 
 Viavdiwa, — name of a country. Area. 
 
 H^r^uv^ti, — loc. Waxa\xva\.a\y2i, Arachosia. 
 
 Hrt-ruv^, — all, every. Skt., s^rv^; Avest., h^^ruv^?; 
 Lat., salvus. 
 
 H^shitiyrt', — rebellious. 
 
 H^shiy/^, — neut. h^-shiy^m, trtie. 
 
 Hin(d)u, — India; region near the river Indus. Skt., 
 sindhu; Avest., hindu. 
 
 Hum^v^rk^, — appellation of the race of the Scythians. 
 
 Hyap^r^, — ace. in adverbial sense; also witfj R^tiy, 
 
 again. From hy^ and 2c^axa. il Q d ^ 1^ *- 
 
U.C.BERKELEY LIBRARIES 
 
 CDMb77EDlb